Past Versions Information

 

 

Version 2017 R18

 

RELEASE DATE: 8/28/2017

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

9

New Product Features

0

Release Enhancements

5

Release Fixes

7

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

3

Admin Changes

1

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE LINKS

 

This section provides quick links to commonly referenced release subjects.

 

Link

Description

Watch Overview Video

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Highlights

This page provides a quick rundown of changes made at each version.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products that are compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, the development environment of MoversSuite is no longer compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when you click on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

This section lists new functionality added to MoversSuite.

 

Combine Multiple Services into a Single Work Ticket and Generate Multiple Work Tickets at One Time

 

A new option is available from the Dispatch Center in Local Dispatch allowing you to combine multiple services into a single Work Ticket. The Combine on Work Ticket option is available through the right-click menu when you select multiple services for the same order and for the same day.

 

Figure 1: Right-click options within the Dispatch Center

 

When you choose this option, the application automatically assigns the services a Ticket Number but does not open the Report Viewer to view the report. However, anytime you press Work Ticket for any of the services associated to the ticket, the Report Viewer opens displaying the combined ticket report.

 

Alternatively, you can combine services without using the Combine on Work Ticket option. This is accomplished by selecting the services and pressing Work Ticket. The application combines all services for the same day and same order into a single ticket.  So, you can select as many services as you like in the grid and the application automatically combines all those with the same order for the same date of service into a single ticket. It also opens the Report Viewer allowing you to view the report for all tickets generated, in other words, the Report Viewer has been updated to view multiple Work Tickets at a time.

 

Figure 2: Sample Work Ticket report within the Report Viewer

 

Of note, if you include services that already have a Ticket Number, then the application simply displays the Work Ticket report.

 

View the Work Ticket topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (3709, 3711)

Combine on Work Ticket option add to Local Dispatch.

Multiple work tickets can be viewed and managed through the Report Viewer.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Dispatch Center

Report Viewer

Right-Click Options (Local Dispatch)

Work Ticket

 

 

 

Additional Work Ticket Report Available

 

In addition to the standard Work Ticket Report, we now offer a specific report geared to the needs of an Office & Industrial move request.

 

The new report will be loaded automatically into your system when you upgrade. It will be available under the Menu Name of Work Ticket (O&I) within Report Setup. Administrators can assign this report to O&I user profiles through Report Profile Setup.

 

The new report is similar to the existing report, except for a few differences. The header includes the branch address and phone number. The Origin and Destination address pull from location set within the Contacts and Locations tab.

 

Figure 3: Work Ticket (O&I) Report

 

And, the crew lists on a second page with a few extra places to enter actual crew times.

 

Figure 4: Crew listing within Work Ticket (O&I) Report

 

View the Work Ticket (O&I) Report topic for the details that list within this report.

 

In a related change, the ability to choose from multiple Work Ticket reports is now available to you.

When multiple Work Ticket reports are available to you through your Report Profile, then when you click on Work Ticket from within the Dispatch Center, each available report displays as an option.

 

Figure 5: Work Ticket options within the Dispatch Center

 

Choose the report you wish to generate and the application opens the report in the Report Viewer.

 

Administrators can assign multiple Work Tickets to a profile through Report Profile Setup. Reports with a System Location of Work Ticket Report appear as an option through the Work Ticket function.

 

Figure 6: Report Setup

 

Of note, if only one report links your Report Profile, then the default Work Ticket automatically generates without requiring you to select it from a list.

 

SUMMARY (3597)

Work Ticket (O&I) available through Report Setup.

Multiple options available through the Work Ticket function.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Report Viewer

Right-Click Options (Local Dispatch)

Work Ticket

Work Ticket (O&I) Report

 

 

Custom Sort Fields Added to Local Dispatch grid

 

Two custom sort fields are available within the Dispatch Center grid in Local Dispatch. Sort 1 and Sort 2 allow you to type a value directly into the grid cell (up to 16 characters). You can use this value to assist you in organizing services and your workflow.

 

Figure 7: Sort columns within the Dispatch Center

 

The features available to other fields in the grid are available to these new fields as well, such as sorting, grouping, filtering, etc. For example, if you entered a Sort 1 of “Crew 1”, then you can filter the grid to just display Crew 1 entries.

 

Figure 8: Filtering options on sort fields

 

In addition to typing directly into either field, you can utilize copy and paste features. Use CTRL+C to copy a text entry from just about any Windows source, including MoversSuite. Use the CTRL+V keyboard combination to paste the entry directly into one of the sort fields.

 

The data entered within Sort 1 or Sort 2 is only available within the Dispatch Center grid.

 

SUMMARY (4103)

Sort 1 and Sort 2 columns added to the Dispatch Center data grid.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Dispatch Center

Schema Changes Version 2017R18

 

 

 

 

 

List of Fields Tracked by Order History Updated

 

The list of fields tracked by Order History now includes the following:

 

On the Military/Government tab:

 

Field

Order History Field Name

Original Weights > Gross

Military Weight - Original Gross

Original Weights > Net

Military Weight - Original Net

Re-Weigh Weights > Gross

Military Weight - Reweigh Gross

Re-Weigh Weights > Net

Military Weight - Reweigh Net

 

Within SIT Information:

 

Field

Order History Field Name

Destination > Out Date Actual

Destination SIT - Actual Out Date

Origin > Out Date Actual

Origin SIT - Actual Out Date

 

Refer to Order History for more information.

 

SUMMARY (4116, 4717)

Order History data updated to include several fields from Military/Government and SIT Information.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Order History

Order History Fields

Schema Changes Version 2017R18

 

 

 

 

Building Constraints Now Link to Buildings

 

For those of you utilizing the Office & Industrial module, you now have a feature allowing you to link defined building constraints directly to building records.

 

The constraints defined within Building Constraints Setup now link to Building Setup records, allowing you to provide specific constraint information for each building.

 

Figure 9: Building Setup

 

By default, all constraints defined within Building Constraints Setup display within the Job Information tab for all buildings. The constraints added within Building Setup records override those set within Building Constraints Setup. This allows you to automatically set Yes flag and to provide a Note pertaining to the specifics of the building record. In the above example (Figure 9), the Elevator constraint overrides the default Note set for the constraint below (Figure 10) and automatic shows the Yes flag as checked.

 

Figure 10: Building Constraint item

 

Again, all defined constraints appear for all buildings. The option to assign specifics for a building is what is now available through Building Setup.

 

Figure 11:Building Constraints tab within Job Information

 

 

SUMMARY (4073)

Building Constraints Setup items link to Building Setup records.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Building Constraints Setup

Building Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R18

 

 

 

 

Building Constraints Available as Letter Management Bookmarks

 

The Building Constraints set within the Job Information tab on an Office & Industrial order are now available as Letter Management bookmarks.

 

Figure 12: Insert Bookmark screen

 

Three bookmarks have been added allowing you to display the constraints of the destination location, the origin location, and all the other locations specified within the Contacts and Locations section.

 

When a document generates with one of the new bookmarks, the application inserts it as a table with appropriate labeled sections and background color.

 

Figure 13: Sample bookmark for Building Constraints

 

You can modify the table by adjusting column width, removing rows, changing font and background color, and more.

 

Specifics of each new bookmark displays in the following table.

 

Bookmark

Description

Destination Location Constraints

Displays the constraints of the location marked as the Location Address Type of Destination (through Add/Edit Order Location).

Origin Location Constraints

Displays the constraints of the location marked as the Location Address Type of Origin (through Add/Edit Order Location).

Other Location Constraints

Displays the constraints of all locations marked with the Location Address Type of Other (through Add/Edit Order Location).

 

Refer to Letter Management and to Office & Industrial Bookmarks for further details.

 

SUMMARY (3954)

Building Constraints Office & Industrial Bookmarks added.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Letter Management

Office & Industrial Bookmarks

 

 

 

 

Additional Bookmarks Available

 

We added several fields to the list of items available as Letter Management Bookmarks. You can now access the following to add to your custom documents and emails.

 

Bookmark Field

Field Location

Discounted Linehaul

Move Information > Discounted Linehaul

Estimate Amount

Billing Information > Estimate Amount

Estimated Weight

Move Information > Estimated Weight

Miles

Move Information > Miles

Purchase Order

Billing Information > Purchase Order

Survey Date

Agents > Survey Date

Survey Time

Agents > Survey Start Time and End Time

Type of Move

Move Information > Type of Move

 

All the new bookmarks list under Order Information Bookmarks, which are available under the Order Information group within the Insert Bookmark screen.

 

Of note, the Survey Time is one bookmark for two fields: Start Time and End Time. If both times are specified, then the bookmark renders the date as the time separated by a dash, e.g. 09:00 AM – 12:00 PM.

 

SUMMARY (4690)

Order Information Bookmarks added.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Order Information Bookmarks

 

 

 

 

UniGroup International Download Sync Function Available

 

When working on an UniGroup International order and you wish to manually sync the order to the data within UniGroup, then you can evoke the UniGroup International Download option. This option is available through the Tools Menu.

 

Figure 14: Tools Menu

 

When you select this option, the application all data associated to the order within the UniGroup International system and updates the corresponding data within MoversSuite.

 

This option is only available for UniGroup International orders viewed through the International Orders module.

 

Refer to UniGroup International Download for more information.

 

SUMMARY (4730)

The UniGroup International Download option added to the Tools Menu.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Tools Menu

UniGroup International Download

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite.

 

Administration

 

User password rule change

When establishing a new MoversSuite user, the application now requires that the password be a minimum of six characters in length (as set through the Password field within the User tab in Personnel Setup).

 

This change only affects newly defined users. All existing users can change their password without needing to specify the new, six-character requirement. (4683)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

Entering actuals for one service is not copied to another

When two requests are assigned to the same crew and actuals entered for one of the services, the application no longer copies the actual data to the other service. (4731)

 

 

Payment Management

 

Generic CSV Import invoice only updates

If the Customer or Service Code is not set within the Generic Import and only the Invoice Number is referenced to identify the order, then the application now set appropriate indicators to identify the needed customer and service codes. Prior to this release, if only the Invoice Number was set (no Order Number nor GBL Number), then the apply was unable to match on service code and a missing customer number resulted in an error when importing through the Statement Import Summary (Generic Import). (4720, 4722)

 

 

Revenue Entry

 

Multiple-session check for generated transactions

When editing revenue items, MoversSuite now checks to verify that transactions have not been generated prior to saving the changes. This check is to ensure that when the same revenue items are being edited concurrently by either another party or by a different session, that the edits made after the transaction give proper notice to the other party or session window. This change affects adding and editing of commissions, Revenue Item, Revenue Group, and third-party items. (4125)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Database changes for this release are visible through the following topic:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R18

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R18)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R18)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R18)

 

 

Version 2017 R17

 

RELEASE DATE: 8/14/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

You can find commonly requested links in this section:

 

Link

Description

Watch Overview Video

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Highlights

This page provides a quick rundown of changes made at each version.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

2

New Product Features

0

Release Enhancements

2

Release Fixes

0

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

0

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products that are compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, the development environment of MoversSuite is no longer compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

 

Invoice Number Only Generic CSV Import Not Working

If the Customer or Service Code is not set within the Generic Import and only the Invoice Number (no Order Number nor GBL Number included) is referenced to identify the order, then the application cannot determine the service codes when applying. Also, the process cannot determine the customer, therefore an error is received when importing the statement. NOTE: If the Order Number or GBL Number is supplied, then the import works as expected. (4720)

 

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when you click on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

This section lists new functionality added to MoversSuite.

 

Scope of Work bookmark added

 

You can now capture the Scope of Work data of an Office & Industrial move as a Letter Management bookmark that you can insert into your documents and emails.

 

The Scope of Work bookmark lists under the Office & Industrial group from within the Insert Bookmark screen.

 

Figure 15: Insert Bookmark screen

 

This bookmark displays the contents of the Scope of Work data entered within the Job Information tab.

 

Figure 16: Scope of Work tab

 

When you generate a document using this bookmark, the output inserts as a table within the document and the content appears as it does within the Scope of Work tab.

 

Figure 17: Generated Letter Management document example

 

A few editing features are available to you once the document generates. For example, you can resize the columns and the grid itself, change the background color of the cells, adjust the font size and font type, indent the text, and more.

 

Figure 18: Updated Letter Management document example

 

View the Job Information, Letter Management, and Office & Industrial Bookmarks topics for more information.

 

SUMMARY (3953, 4712)

Scope of Work added as Letter Management Bookmarks.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Insert Bookmark

Job Information

Letter Management Bookmarks

Office & Industrial Bookmarks

 

 

 

 

MSCrew Version 1.1

 

The MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application has been improved and a new release of this version is available through the iTunes App Store.

 

Version 1.1 features improvements allowing crew leads to perform the following through their mobile device:

    Add order notes

    Add a Change Order request

    Add a Job Summary request

    Add an Internal Summary request

 

Additionally, the mobile application provides the ability to capture lead and client signatures of approval for the Change Order, Job Summary, and Internal Summary documents.

 

Also, users can now access contact information for Dispatcher and Project Manager through the Assistance listing on the Contacts screen.

 

Figure 19: Contacts screen

 

 

Change Order, Job Summary, and Internal Summary

 

Crew leads can generate documents for Change Order request, a Job Summary, and Internal Summary through the mobile application that capture the signature of the lead as well as that of the client. The new options are available from the Info screen.

 

Figure 20: Info screen

 

 

The Change Order request results in a generated document that includes the signatures captured by the device, along with summary information of the service and the specifics of the request. Your company logo also displays on the output that is stored within the Document Management system and can be emailed directly from the device. You can also view the Change Order through the Documents screen within the mobile application.

 

Figure 21: Change Order example

 

The Job Summary documents the specifics of the move by detailing the actuals submitted and approved by the client. There is also an Internal Summary document that reports the same information but includes the actual name of personnel assigned to the service.

 

 

Figure 22: Job Summary example

 

You can specify the logo that appears on these documents through the Mobile Company Logo Setup.

 

The Signature screen appears automatically when generating a Change Order, Job Summary, or Internal Summary. It provides the lead the opportunity to record their signature along that of the client.

 

Figure 23: Signature capture

 

 

Add Order Note

 

Leads can add an order note through the Notes screen. The Add Note option prompts the lead to enter the subject and text of the note. The approved note is attached to the order and is visible through the Notes tab and through the Notes screen within the mobile application.

 

Figure 24: Adding a note through the mobile device

 

 

Administrative Changes

 

Utilize the Mobile Api Setup to establish default note and document types for the items generated through the mobile device.

 

Figure 25: Mobile Api Setup

 

The default note type references values defined within the Note Type Setup. The document types available are from those found within Document Type Setup.

 

Learn more about the new features available to the MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application through the following topics and by watching the overview video for this release:

MoversSuiteCrew Add Note

MoversSuiteCrew Change Order

MoversSuiteCrew Internal Summary

MoversSuiteCrew Job Summary

MoversSuiteCrew Signature

 

SUMMARY (4097)

The ability to add a note, Change Order, Internal Summary, and Job Summary have been added to the MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application.

New administrative fields for Order Note Type, Change Order Document Type, Job Detail Document Type, Job Summary Document Type added to Mobile Api Setup.

Signature capture screen added to the MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application.

Assistance types of Dispatcher and Project Manager added to the Contacts screen within the MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Mobile Api Setup

MoversSuiteCrew Add Note

MoversSuiteCrew Change Order

MoversSuiteCrew Internal Summary

MoversSuiteCrew Job Summary

MoversSuiteCrew Signature

 

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite.

 

Connections

 

International data included when no Booking Agent specified

The UniGroup International Download now correctly identifies the Booking Agent on the order and downloads all appropriate international data. Prior to this release, if the booking information was not set (e.g. Booking Agent), then much of the international data was not included in the download. (4714)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

New leads associate to the Order Information module

When you create a lead through the New option within Local Dispatch, the new lead links to the Order Information module and opens when the entry is saved. (4704)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Database changes for this release are visible through the following topic:

 

NO SCHEMA CHANGES FOR THIS RELEASE

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R17)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R17)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R17)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R16

 

RELEASE DATE: 7/31/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

You can find commonly requested links in this section:

 

Link

Description

Watch Overview Video

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Highlights

This page provides a quick rundown of changes made at each version.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

5

New Product Features

1

Release Enhancements

15

Release Fixes

2

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

4

Admin Changes

1

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, the development environment of MoversSuite is no longer compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when you click on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

This section lists new functionality added to MoversSuite.

 

Add a contact to a quote video-play-xxl

 

When establishing a Quote, you now have the option to specify the person that the quote was prepared for. This person displays on the quote report and you can access their contact information through Letter Management Bookmarks.

 

The list of people available to the Quote prepared for field include those assigned as contacts on the order for Office & Industrial moves or those associated to the Account Profile on the order (for all non-Office & Industrial moves).

 

SNAGHTML13e43856

Figure 26: Quote tab

 

In addition to the contacts available to you, you can manually add a contact to the list through the Add Contact feature. This opens the Add/Edit Order Contact screen allowing you to define a new contact record for the order and, optionally, add the contact permanently to the Account Profile set on the order. Once the contact record is saved, it becomes available for assignment to any quote on the order through the Quote prepared for field.

 

On the standard Quote Form, when a contact is associated to the quote, the contact information displays in place of the customer.

 

Figure 27: Quote Form

 

For Letter Management Bookmarks, you can access the following data set for the quote contact within your customized letter documents and emails.

Quote Prepared For Address Formatted

Quote Prepared For Address Line 1

Quote Prepared For Address Line 2

Quote Prepared For Address Line 3

Quote Prepared For City

Quote Prepared For Country Code

Quote Prepared For Country Name

Quote Prepared For Name

Quote Prepared For Postal Code

Quote Prepared For State

 

All the above items are found within the Quotes group within the Insert Bookmark screen. Refer to the Quote Bookmarks topic for details on the above bookmarks.

 

SUMMARY (3588)

Quote prepared for and Add Contact added the Quote tab.

Quote Prepared For items added to Quote Bookmarks.

Quote contact now displays on the Quote Form.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Add/Edit Order Contact

Quote

Quote Bookmarks

Quote Form

Schema Changes Version 2017R16

 

 

 

 

User login information captured video-play-xxl

 

Your company administrators have access to the date when a user last logged into MoversSuite. The Last logged into MoversSuite field is available through the User tab on each Personnel Setup record.

 

Figure 28: User tab within Personnel Setup

 

View the Last Logged In date for all active employees through the User Details List Report.

 

Figure 29: User Details List report

 

SUMMARY (4037)

Last logged into MoversSuite added to the User tab within Personnel Setup.

Last Logged In added to the User Details List Report.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Personnel Setup

User Details List Report

Schema Changes Version 2017R16

 

 

 

 

 

 

New Office & Industrial Bookmarks video-play-xxl

 

Two new Letter Management Bookmarks are available for Office & Industrial orders. They include the Client Note and Operational Note bookmarks and display data set within the Job Information tab. Both the Client Note and Operation Note are available through the Office & Industrial group when adding bookmarks to documents through the Insert Bookmark screen.

 

SNAGHTML1d837766

Figure 30: Insert Bookmark screen

 

The formatting specified on the note is retained when the output generates based on the template that includes the new bookmarks.

 

 

Figure 31: Client Notes example

 

The output associated to the Client Note above (Figure 31) displays automatically with the same format, when the document generates.

Figure 32: Output of Client Notes bookmark example

 

Refer to the Letter Management topic for more information on creating customized documents and emails.

 

SUMMARY (3951, 3952)

Client Note and Operational Note added as Letter Management Bookmarks.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Insert Bookmark

Job Information

Letter Management Bookmarks

Office & Industrial Bookmarks

 

 

 

 

 

Atlas SUDS Interface XML Download

 

The Atlas SUDS Order Download process has been modified to now accept XML formatted requests from Atlas SUDS interface that add orders directly into MoversSuite while utilizing the Standard XML Pipeline. Prior to this feature, MoversSuite only accepted physical files and interpreted them based on their location on your system.

 

Only a few configuration changes are needed to begin utilizing direct XML through the Atlas SUDS Order Download process. You can view the Atlas SUDS XML Order Download Setup topic to see a full set of setup instructions.

 

SUMMARY (4101)

XML format available for Atlas SUDS Order Download.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Atlas SUDS Order Download

Atlas SUDS Flat File Order Download Setup

Atlas SUDS XML Order Download Setup

Atlas Integration Initial Setup

Atlas Integration Setup and Administration

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists improvements made to MoversSuite.

 

Generic Import can identify record based on Invoice Number

 

The Generic Import process can now identify a MoversSuite order based on the Invoice Number included in the file. Prior to this enhancement, the Order Number or GBL Number was needed to identify a MoversSuite record. Many of you utilize the Generic Import to process remittance information that may not necessarily include an Order Number or GBL Number.

 

If your file includes the Order Number or GBL Number, then the application attempts to locate the order by matching one of these values. Otherwise, if neither is specified, then the application attempts to locate the order based on what is specified for the Invoice Number in the file.

 

SUMMARY (4660)

The Generic Import process can identify a MoversSuite record based on the Invoice Number.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Generic Import

Generic Import File Format

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite.

 

General Application

 

Updated development tools to correct screen scaling

The DevExpress tool utilized to compile the MoversSuite application have been updated. The newly updated software and related VCL libraries are needed to address a scaling issue on some environments, most notably on the MoversSuite cloud-hosting environment (Microsoft Azure). (4129)

 

Related Orders accessing correct security information

The security around the Related Order functionality (Move Information tab) for the Find and Go To features has been improved to recognize user security access. Prior to this release, the Related Order functionality only worked inside the International Orders and Special Services modules if the person also had security access to Order Information. (4666)

 

 

Administration

 

Incorrect Rate Mask on Commissions

Although all calculations for commissions are correct, the Commission Amount displays as a dollar amount though the Commission Type is set to Percentage within the Commission Plan Setup.

 

SNAGHTML3b0cf46

Figure 33: Commission Plan Detail within Commission Plan Setup

 

In the above example (Figure 34), the Commission Amount should read as “100%.” Again, the application calculates the commission amount correctly based on the type. With this release, no masking of the Commission Amount displays. (4687)

 

Atlas Statement Security Module

The upgrade process now inserts the Atlas Statement Integration module into the MoversSuite database. Prior to this release, the EWS Group Support Team manually added this module where needed. On systems that utilize this module, you can assign personnel to this module through their Security Profile Setup. Refer to the Atlas Statement Integration listing within Security Modules for more information. (1411)

 

MoversSuite API Service auto start after reboot

Options have been implemented to set the MoversSuite API Service to automatically start on a delay after an upgrade (which generally involves a system reboot). The option applied of Automatic (delayed start) gives the Microsoft SQL Server a chance to be up and running before the MoversSuite API Service is started. (1560)

 

 

Connections

 

SIRVA QLAB processes all imports based on UTC time

Time issues related to order notes downloaded through the SIRVA QLAB Integration system have been corrected by updating all processes to be based the UTC time. (3783)

 

Shipment Type converted correctly on upgrades

The upgrade process updates the mapping for Shipment Type Setup records to reference the correct XML Interface. Prior to this release, the upgrade process did not set the interface mapping on Shipment Type records which caused errors within the UniGroup HHG Upload. (4668)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

Notification emails sent correctly

When multiple services are selected and the services cleared or declined within the Requested Services screen, individual email messages are sent out to each appropriate party on the order. Prior to this release, if multiple services were selected and cleared at the same time, a single email message was sent to potentially the wrong audience. (4075)

 

 

Payment Management

 

Auto Apply Options default to those set through Payment Application

The settings you save through the Import Auto Apply Options screen from within Payment Application are now available as the default settings when accessing this same screen from within Statement Import Summary. (3874)

 

Cleared Driver Number field no longer causing CSV statement import error

When a Driver Number is cleared (blanked-out) within the Dispatch tab on Personnel Setup records, the application sets the value to a NULL within the database. This prevents any confusion about whether the field is set or not. Prior to this release, it appeared that multiple drivers (all with blank Driver Number values) were attached to the same vendor account which prevented statements from importing through the CSV Import process. (4679)

 

No more error message when attempting to add a duplicate order to a payment

You can use the Quick Find and the Find available through the Payment Application screen to add an order to a payment. With this release, if you attempt to add an order that already exists on the payment, instead of receiving an error message, the application automatically expands the payment information for the specific order you were searching for. On previous releases, if you attempted to add an order that was already on the payment, you received the following error: “That order is on the current payment and will be ignored.” (4662)

 

 

Recurring Billing

 

Handling of archived orders on storage run

When storage billing is run in arrears, the application retrieves the original Order Number associated to an archived order for proper billing during the time the order was active during the billing period. Prior to this release, if the application encountered an archived order with active billing, it would halt the storage run with an error. (3716)

 

Field label correction within Payment Setup

The Payment Setup field label related to the email generated through Recurring Billing and Storage has been updated to indicate Email Recurring Billing Invoice to by default. Prior to this release, the label indicated AutoPay Cash Receipt, though no option was set for the AutoPay Setup option. (3493, 3532)

 

 

Reporting

 

Dispatching Services report runs without error

The Dispatching Services Report now runs without error. This report lists all cleared services for a given date range. Prior to this release, the report did not run due to an “invalid object name” error associated to recent changes related to the Local Service Unit Type Setup. (4700)

 

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Database changes for this release are visible through the following topic:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R16

 

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R16)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R16)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R16)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R15

 

RELEASE DATE: 7/17/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

You can find commonly requested links in this section:

 

Link

Description

Watch Overview Video

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Highlights

This page provides a quick rundown of changes made at each version.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

6

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

10

Release Fixes

4

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

3

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, the development environment of MoversSuite is no longer compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

NEW: Incorrect Rate Mask on Commissions

Although all calculations for commissions are correct, the Commission Amount displays as a dollar amount even though the Commission Type is set to Percentage within the Commission Plan Setup.

 

Figure 34: Commission Plan Detail within Commission Plan Setup

 

In the above example (Figure 34), the Commission Amount should read as “100%.” Again, the application calculates correct based on the type, i.e. the example amount is interpreted as 100%. (4687)

 

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when you click on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

This section lists new functionality added to MoversSuite.

 

Local Service Unit Standardization

 

The administrative side of Local Services setup has been standardized to allow your company to define custom units for calculations of hourly crew needs. On prior releases, the options within System Wide Options allowed you to set the following:

    Minimum Number of Packers

    Minimum Number of Loaders

    Maximum Number of Cartons

    Number of Hours per Packer per Day

    Number of Hours per Mover per Day

    Maximum Load Weight

    Cartons per Hour

And in Local Service Type Setup you could specify the following:

    Average Cartons per Hour

    Average Weight per Hour

 

All nine of these options have been removed and replaced by settings within Local Service Type Setup and Local Service Type Setup. The following table provides a summary of the changes made to these settings.

 

Old Setting

Replaced by

Minimum Number of Packers

Minimum Number of Loaders

Minimum Crew within Local Service Unit Type Setup.

Number of Hours per Packer per Day

Number of Hours per Mover per Day

Number of Hours per Crew within Local Service Unit Type Setup.

Maximum Number of Cartons

Maximum Load Weight

No longer needed

Cartons per Hour

Average Cartons per Hour

Average Weight per Hour

Units per Hour within Local Service Type Setup.

 

Additionally, the Units setting within Local Service Type Setup provided only two options for Weight and Cartons. These options are now part of the Local Service Unit Type Setup that allows you to define custom units assignable to a Local Service Type. Further, you can now specify a Field Label for the type that displays within the Add Local Service screen.

 

Figure 35: Local Service Type Setup defaults of Cartons and Weight options

 

Additionally, the average settings associated to a Local Service Type have been incorporated into a single Units per Hour setting within Local Service Type Setup (Figure 36).

 

Figure 36: Local Service Type Setup

 

MoversSuite updates existing Local Service Types to reflect the new settings during the upgrade process. It utilizes the values within the prior settings along with what is set for the Labor Type field within Local Service Type Setup to determine values for the new fields.

 

In addition to the two default units for Cartons and Weight, your company can establish additional types to accommodate a variety of needs. For example, you can establish a type for packing computers within Local Service Unit Type Setup.

 

Figure 37: Local Service Unit Type Setup

 

Based on the example above, new Local Services requests would include at least one crew person and will assign an additional crew person once the total number of hours reaches 5.

 

This Unit Type is assigned to the Local Service Type through the Units field within Local Service Type Setup. Assuming that a typical person can pack ten computers per hour, set the Units per Hour to 10 (Figure 38).

 

Figure 38: Local Service Type Setup

 

Continuing with these example settings, when a request is established within Add Local Service for 75 computers, the application computes Total Hours Required of 8.50. This includes 7.5 hours for labor (75 computers divided by 10 units per hour) plus an additional one hour for drive time. Since the time needed exceeded 5 (set as the Number of Hours per Crew), an additional person was added to the service request (Figure 39).

 

Figure 39: Add Local Service

 

Refer to Add Local Service, Local Service Type Setup, and to Local Service Unit Type Setup for more information.

 

SUMMARY (4119, 4670, 4672)

Minimum Number of Packers, Minimum Number of Loaders, Maximum Number of Cartons, Number of Hours per Packer per Day, Number of Hours per Mover per Day, Maximum Load Weight, and Cartons per Hour removed from System Wide Options.

Average Cartons per Hour and Average Weight per Hour removed from Local Service Type Setup.

Units per Hour added to Local Service Type Setup.

Minimum Crew, Number of Hours per Crew, and Field Label added to Local Service Unit Type Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Add Local Service

Local Service Type Setup

Local Service Unit Type Setup

System Wide Options

Schema Changes Version 2017R15

 

 

 

Save Features Added to Day Note

 

The Day Note functionality on the Dispatch Center tab has been improved to include a date selector; the additions of Auto Save, Save Note, and Cancel options; and functionality to manage concurrent note updates from multiple users.

 

Figure 40: Day Note section within the Dispatch Center

 

The date selector allows you to view a Day Note without having to navigate away from the Dispatch Center tab. The selector provides the ability to enter a date manually or choose one from the date menu. Once a selection is made, the Day Note for the corresponding date displays.

 

Figure 41: Calendar Control

 

Save options include the options to Save Note or Cancel your changes, and an Auto Save option that keeps any changes you make automatically without the need to press Save Note.

 

Changes made on the Day Notes tab include the ability to Save and to Delete the note altogether.

 

When changes are made and not saved, the application recognizes this and prompts you to save the updates or to disregard them.

 

Figure 42: Note exists notification

 

The application also confirms any changes made by another user that may be updating the note for the same day at the same time. In the case that a note was updated while you were making changes, you receive a prompt requesting to append the Day Note with your changes.

 

Figure 43: Concurrent note update warning

 

If you continue with adding the note, the application inserts the text of your note into the body of the one saved by a different user. The application also tags the addition with “—Appended” followed by the date and time the addition was made.

Figure 44: Day Note section within Dispatch Center

 

 

SUMMARY (3803, 4124, 4669)

Updates made to the Day Note functionality.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Day Note

Day Notes

 

 

 

Additional Job Costing Fields

 

The Job Costing data available through the Single Order tab now includes the following data fields:

 

New Field

Description

Work Ticket

The Work Ticket for the service displays.

Crew Count

Number of people assigned for a Labor expense type displays.

Hours per Crew

Number of hours anticipated for each person to work under the service displays.

Hourly Rate

Hourly rate for the service work displays.

Rate Type

Displays the type of rating applied to the service as one of the following:

Regular

Double Time

Overtime

 

 

Figure 45: Single Order tab within Job Costing


View the Job Costing topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (4104)

Fields added to the Single Order tab within the Job Costing screen.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Single Order

Schema Changes Version 2017R15

 

 

Work Ticket in Local Dispatch Grid

 

You can now reference the Work Ticket number associated to a Local Services request within the Dispatch Center data grid.

 

Figure 46: Dispatch Center tab

 

Refer to the Dispatch Center topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (3804)

Work Ticket number added to the Dispatch Center data grid.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Dispatch Center

 

 

 

 

Valuation added to the list of required fields

 

Valuation set on the Move Information tab is now available as a required field.

 

Figure 47: Move Information tab

 

You now have the Valuation option that you can assign to events within the Field Requirements Setup.

 

Figure 48: On Create event within Field Requirements Setup

 

Refer to the Field Requirements topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (4078)

Valuation added to the list of required fields within Field Requirements Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Field Requirements Setup

 

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists improvements made to MoversSuite.

 

Rate Field Expansion

 

The rate amount field in MoversSuite has been expanded to accommodate additional places beyond two decimals. For example, you can now provide rate information for a sales tax with three or four places, e.g. 7.375.

 

This change affects rates assigned to a rate plan through Rate Plan Setup.

 

Figure 49: Add/Edit Rate section within Rate Plan Setup

 

This change also affects rates applied throughout the application, such as when adding revenue items and group.

 

Figure 50: Add/Edit Revenue Group screen

 

Output, such as invoices, automatically display the expanded rate.

 

Figure 51: Invoice sample

 

This change affects all functions that utilize rates, which includes the following:

Add Revenue Group

Add Revenue Item

Commissions

Invoicing

Job Costing

Quote

Rate Plan Setup

Rating Systems

Recurring Billing

 

SUMMARY (3690)

Rate within Rate Plan Setup expanded to accommodate up to four decimal places.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Rate Plan Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R15

 

 

 

 

 

Rearranged Tab Order in Office & Industrial

 

The tab display order within the module has been modified.

 

Figure 52: Office & Industrial tabs

 

The tab order now lists in the following order:

Contacts and Locations

Job Information

Local Services

Quote

SIT/Recurring Billing

Billing Information

Tasks

Notes

User Defined Fields

Account Profile

 

The new tab order reflects the anticipated work flow through a typical order.

 

SUMMARY (4050)

The tab order within the Office & Industrial module has been updated.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Office & Industrial

 

 

 

Destination tab active by default in SIT Information

 

The Destination tab for SIT Information is now open (or active) by default when you open the SIT/Recurring Billing tab.

 

Figure 53: SIT/Recurring Billing tab

 

 

SUMMARY (4079)

Destination tab is open by default when viewing the SIT Information tab.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

SIT Information

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite.

 

General Application

 

Index added to AcctTransactions table

In order to increase runtime processing, an index has been added to the AcctTransactions table on a combination of Order Number, Item Description, and Source. This improves the efficiency of retrieving information related to accounting transactions stored within MoversSuite. (4100)

 

 

Connections

 

Document Management file path saved on Azure

The application now saves the last path you accessed when adding documents through Document Management on the MoversSuite hosted environment (Azure). (2501)

 

Time correct on SIRVA QLAB downloads

The application now adjusts based on UTC times for items imported through the SIRVA QLAB Integration. Prior to this fix, the time indicated when notes imported were incorrect. (3784)

 

International Orders changes no longer affect SIRVA QLAB requirements

The requirements for a user credentials now only affect UniGroup International orders. Prior to this fix, the requirement checks also affected SIRVA QLAB Integration. (4681)

 

Modifications for in-flight orders in UniGroup International

The UniGroup International system has been updated to recognize when an order exists in trafficking. In such cases, MoversSuite requests a download and provides a message regarding the status within Third Party Application Error Management. (4661)

 

UniGroup International orders prevented from being rebooking

If an International Orders record is booked and linked to the UniGroup International system, then MoversSuite does not allow the order to be rebooked. (4682)

 

 

Letter Management

 

“C” removed from Claim Items bookmark

The Claim Items bookmark within the Letter Management system no longer displays an extra letter “C” at the start of the first item listing. (4028)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

Calculated service hours no longer being cleared

The number of hours anticipated for a service is no longer being cleared when the service is edited. Prior to this release, some events triggered the Hrs/Man field within Add Local Service to be cleared when the service was edited. (4065)

 

 

Office & Industrial

 

Required field updates for Office & Industrial orders

When Field Requirements logic is evoked for an Office & Industrial order, the application no longer attempts to validate fields that are not available through the Office & Industrial module. (4076)

 

 

Recurring Billing & Storage

 

Correct storage begin date displays on invoice items

Prior to this release, invoices for storage billing incorrectly displayed the Begin Billing Date of the entire billing record (set on the Billing Record tab) and not the start billing date for the specific item (set the Billing Items tab) when listing detail storage items. The application did calculate the storage amount correctly. And, with this release, now displays the starting date of the storage item correctly on invoices. (3802)

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Database changes for this release are visible through the following topic:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R15

 

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R15)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R15)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R15)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R14

 

RELEASE DATE: 7/3/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

You can find commonly requested links in this section:

 

Link

Description

Watch Overview Video

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Highlights

This page provides a quick rundown of changes made at each version.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

2

New Product Features

1

Release Enhancements

12

Release Fixes

6

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

7

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, the development environment of MoversSuite is no longer compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

This section lists new functionality added to MoversSuite.

 

Customizable Unit Types for Local Service Types

 

Changes to the Local Service Type Setup allow your company to specify custom units for the labels and calculation of Local Services requests.

 

You can create values within the new Local Service Unit Type Setup.

 

Figure 54: Local Service Unit Type setup

 

And, assign them to the Units field within Local Service Type Setup.

 

Figure 55: Local Service Type setup

 

There is no longer a need to specify separate unit of measurements by weight or carton count, so the Average Cartons per Hour and Average Weight per Hour fields have been incorporated into a single Units per Hour field.

 

Figure 56: Local Service Type setup

 

MoversSuite automatically converts any existing Average Cartons per Hour and Average Weight per Hour value to corresponding Units per Hour value. For example, an Average Weight per Hour value of 600 before the release translates into 600 in the new Units per Hour field.

 

More changes related to this functionality are slated for the next release of MoversSuite.

 

SUMMARY (8348)

Average Cartons per Hour and Average Weight per Hour fields replaced by Units per Hour within Local Service Type Setup.

Units field references values pulled from the new Local Service Unit Type Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Local Service Type Setup

Local Service Unit Type Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R14

 

 

 

 

MoversSuiteCrew Updates

 

Several features are available through the MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application. They include the ability to upload notes (memos), attach documents, and add contacts through the hand-held device. Additionally, a company logo can be established to display on documents generated through the MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application.

 

In Mobile Api Setup, additional fields allow your company to define default types for the notes and documents generated through the MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application.

 

Figure 57: Mobile Api Setup

 

New Mobile Api Setup settings include the following:

    Order Note Type

    Change Order Document Type

    Job Detail Document Type

    Job Summary Document Type

 

The label for Mobile App Created Document Type has been changed to Picture/Image/Other/Default Document Type.

 

A new setup area is available through the MoversConnect group. The Mobile Company Logo Setup allows you to set the logo that displays on documents generated through the MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application.

Figure 58: Mobile Company Logo Setup

 

Refer to the MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application topic for usage information on these new features.

 

SUMMARY (8928)

Fields added to Mobile Api Setup.

Mobile Company Logo Setup Added.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Mobile Api Setup

Mobile Company Logo Setup

MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists improvements made to MoversSuite.

 

O&I Invoices display Origin and Destination Addresses

 

You now have the option to specify an Origin and Destination address from the list of Locations found on the Contacts and Locations tab of an Office & Industrial order. The Location Address Type option is available when you add or edit a location through the Add/Edit Order Location screen and provides the choices of Origin, Destination, and Other.

 

Figure 59: Add/Edit Order Location

 

The default is set to Other when you add a new location. Further, the system allows only one Origin and one Destination address. For example, if you add a new location and select Origin and there was already an Origin location, the application updates the new record to be the Origin and changes the existing one to Other; you do not receive a warning or error.

 

With this change, addresses associated to the Origin and Destination location of an Office & Industrial order display on invoices.

 

SUMMARY (8896)

Location Address Type added to Add/Edit Order Location.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Add/Edit Order Location

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite.

 

Connections

 

Country code for Extra Stops interpreted

The country code of each Extra Stops record is now interpreted and set correctly. Prior to this release the default country code set within the System Wide Options was referenced. This change affects all imports utilizing the Standard XML Pipeline, which include imports from Atlas and UniGroup. (4671)

 

No duplicate ports for International Order download

A check has been added to avoid duplicate ports within the Vessel/Voyage and Flight Information listing when an order downloads. Prior to this release, duplicate ports for different legs appeared after an import into the International Orders module. (4675)

 

Error handled for lift vans/containers on order but not on download

An issue has been corrected that caused an exception on an import from UniGroup International. Prior to this release, if an existing order in MoversSuite contained either a lift van or container and the import order did not, then an error state was encountered for the order import. (4677)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

Improved security for Local Dispatch

The security around the Local Dispatch module is now independent from that of the Order Information module. On past releases, you could perform some functions through Local Dispatch without having proper security access. Now you can only view, edit, and add orders in Local Dispatch to which you have appropriate branch access through the Local Dispatch module. In other words, if you wish to add services through Local Dispatch for Branch A, then you must have FULL access to the Local Dispatch module for Branch A established within your Security Profile Setup record.

 

Related to this change is an update to the Open Order function within Local Dispatch. You now receive a warning if you attempt to open an order associated to a module that you cannot access (based on Security Profile Setup).

 

Figure 60: Information dialog

 

(8801, 8829)

 

Clear Service Times

You now have the option to clear service times not associated to crew or equipment assignments. To clear the times within the dialog, highlight the entry, press the Delete key (on your keyboard), and then click in a different field. The service time resets to its default of 12:00 AM but once you save the entry, this default clears out as well.

 

Figure 61: Set Service Time screen

 

The service times are required if the Apply to Crew/Equipment flag is set.

 

Figure 62: Set Service Time screen

 

Further, if you attempt to save a record without an appropriate time range and with this flag set, you receive a warning.

 

Figure 63: Warning dialog

 

(8859)

 

 

Local Services

 

Day Note displaying correctly on new services

The Day Note section appears correctly when adding a new service through Add Local Service. (4099)

 

 

MoversSuite Email

 

Outlook image handling

An image (e.g. picture) sent through the MoversSuite Email Service is now formatted to allow the image to be accessible and visible through Microsoft Outlook. (8899)

 

No errors on recurring storage run with automatic email messaging

MoversSuite Email Service no longer causes errors during a Recurring Billing storage run. Prior to this release, the storage billing run would produce an error when setup to automatically email invoices to storage accounts. (8953)

 

 

UniGroup International

 

Correct mapping for phone number types on download

An issue with the mapping of phone types has been fixed. This issue prevented origin and destination, along with affect phone numbers, to not download from UniGroup International. (4109)

 

Message regarding upload/download

When an upload or download occurs, a message is written to the Third Party Application Error Management log to provide information on when the last update occurred. Prior to this fix, only errors were written. (4108)

 

Updated mapping codes

The mapping codes associated to an order have been updated as follows:

    Added PERMANENT_STORAGE as a supported Service Type Setup record

    Changed GOVERNMENT_NON_MILITARY to GOVERNMENT_NONMILITARY within the mapped code for Shipment Type Setup records

(4676)

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Database changes for this release are visible through the following topic:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R14

 

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R14)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R14)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R14)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R13

 

RELEASE DATE: 6/19/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

You can find commonly requested links in this section:

 

Link

Description

Watch Overview Video

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Highlights

This page provides a quick rundown of changes made at each version.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

New Product Features

 

Release Enhancements

2

Release Fixes

 

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

 

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, the development environment of MoversSuite is no longer compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

This section lists new functionality added to MoversSuite.

 

UniGroup International Interface

 

The UniGroup International Interface is now available. With this interface, you can upload and register MoversSuite orders within the UniGroup International system. Once registered, data changes made within UniGroup International reflect automatically in MoversSuite. Likewise, changes made in MoversSuite reflect automatically within UniGroup International when an International Orders record is saved.

 

New Processes:

UniGroup International Download

UniGroup International Upload

 

Shared MoversSuite Content:

UniGroup International Upload and Download Content

 

Setup Information:

UniGroup International Setup and Administration

 

 

SUMMARY (8666)

UniGroup International Interface is available.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

UniGroup International Interface

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite.

 

Long Distance Dispatch

 

Load Date included in Orders find

The application retrieves orders by comparing the Load Date of the order to the Load Date set within the Find on the Orders tab. This comparison now includes the Load Date itself along with any days into the future. For example, if the Load Date is set to the current day for the Find, then the system returns all orders with a Load Date equal to or greater than the current day. (8269)

 

 

Revenue Entry

 

Third Party Error now includes Order Number

When you attempt to Add Third Party Item for a vendor already referenced by an archived order, the error message returns now includes the Order Number. The text of this message displays as “This third party invoice has already been generated on order” followed by the actual Order Number. (8438)

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

NO SCHEMA CHANGES FOR THIS RELEASE

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R13)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R13)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R13)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R12

 

RELEASE DATE: 6/5/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

You can find commonly requested links in this section:

 

Link

Description

Watch Overview Video

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Highlights

This page provides a quick rundown of changes made at each version.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

3

New Product Features

3

Release Enhancements

1

Release Fixes

11

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

3

Admin Changes

2

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, the development environment of MoversSuite is no longer compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

This section lists new functionality added to MoversSuite.

 

Improved Options for Import Revenue from Local Services

 

When you import revenue for Local Services through the Import Actuals function, you now have two options to assist you in determining how the items import.

 

Figure 64: Import Actuals screen

 

Import Revenue As options:

 

Import Labor and Hourly Equipment as a single revenue item

Choose this option to bring in revenue associated to labor and/or hourly-based equipment as a single transaction item. When importing items, the application combines revenue for the same Service Code (Item Code) across multiple items into a single line entry. For example, if there are two items under Service Code 6016, then the application combines the amount into a single entry under the 6016 code. This is the default behavior of the import function, i.e. how it worked before this release.

 

Import Labor and Hourly Equipment as individual revenue items

Choose this option to import revenue items associated to labor and/or hourly-based equipment as separate revenue line items based on the rate amount applied, as either regular, overtime, or double time. For example, if multiple crew work the service and their time links to a single Service Code, then the application creates up to three separate revenue items under that same Service Code: One for regular time, one for overtime, and one for double time.

 

For example, if you have hourly charges to Service Code 6016 at a regular rate of $35 and an overtime rate of $52.50, then two items list for Service Code 6016 (Figure 65).

 

Figure 65: Transaction tab

 

Additionally, equipment resources charged on an hourly basis list separately.

 

Figure 66: Transactions grid

 

In addition to the two import options, the application includes the work ticket number and date of service within the group and item description. In the above example (Figure 66), the work ticket number of 1001 is appended to the group name for “Local Move” and the service date of “05/15/2017” prepends the description for each imported item.

 

SUMMARY (8613)

Options added to Import Actuals.

Imported Local Services items display the work ticket number in the title of the revenue group along with the service date within the description for each imported item.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Import Actuals

Transactions

 

 

Additional Required Fields Available

 

The list of Required Fields now includes the following items:

 

Required Field

Location

Discounted Linehaul

Move Information > Discounted Linehaul

Lead Source

Name, Address, Phone > Lead Source

Logistics Coordinator

 

Name, Address, Phone > Logistics Coordinator

Salesperson

Name, Address, Phone > Salesperson

Shipper Email

Name, Address, Phone > Shipper Contact Information > Email

Service Type

Move Information > Service Type

 

View the Field Requirements Setup topic for a complete list of required fields and events that trigger Required Fields functionality.

 

SUMMARY (8883)

Additional Required Fields added to the system.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Field Requirements Setup

Required Fields

 

 

 

 

Sales Team Commission Split

 

Your company now has the option to automatically split commissions based on a sales team assigned to the Account Profile of an order.

 

Figure 67: Order Defaults tab in Account Profile Setup

 

Within Account Profile Setup, you can now define a sales team comprising of Commissionable Employees that receive a share of the commission received by the Salesperson on the order. Use the Sales Team Split section on the Order Defaults tab to establish the person receiving the split along with their percentage.

 

Figure 68: Add Sales Team Split screen

 

In MoversSuite, the application auto-generates the split commissions based on the profile settings. Additionally, split commissions generate automatically when adding commissions manually through the Add Revenue Commission screen.

 

Figure 69: Add Revenue Commission screen

 

In order for the application to automatically generate the Sales Team Split, the Salesperson on the order must match the Salesperson set on the Account Profile assigned to the order. Personnel on the Sales Team must also be Commissionable Employees but do not need to be assigned to the order to receive the split.

 

SUMMARY (8788)

Sales Team Split added to the Order Defaults within Account Profile Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Account Profile Setup

Add Revenue Commission

Add Sales Team Split

Auto Commissions

Auto Commissions Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R12

 

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists improvements made to MoversSuite.

 

Add service in Local Dispatch without selecting a date range

 

On prior releases, if there were no services listed in the main grid, then the Add button was disabled. The Add button allows you to create a new Local Services request that is already available for dispatching.

 

With this release, the Add button is enabled within the Dispatch Center at all times.

 

Figure 70: Dispatch Center tab

 

SUMMARY (8802)

Add button enabled at all times within the Dispatch Center tab.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Dispatch Center

 

 

 

 

Work Ticket Report no longer displays Dispatch Note

 

With the ability to display Service Instructions on the Work Ticket Report (MoversSuite 2016 R03), the need to display a Dispatch Note became superfluous. The Dispatch Note listed on the report under Service Note.

 

SUMMARY (8895)

Service Note section removed from the Work Ticket Report.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Work Ticket Report

 

 

 

 

Increased Branch Name for Invoices and Reports

 

You can now specify up to 255 characters for the branch name that appears on invoices and work tickets.

 

The Title set for the various address types within Branch Setup has been increased in size from 50 characters to 255.

 

Figure 71: Add/Edit Branch Address within Branch Setup

 

This change affects what displays on Invoices and the Work Ticket Report.

 

Figure 72: Invoice example

 

This change only applies to newly created reports and invoices. Invoices and reports already generated are not affected by this change.

 

SUMMARY (8892)

Title field for each Branch Address within Branch Setup has been expanded to 255 characters.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Branch Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R12

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite.

 

Local Dispatch

 

Clear Service email now references service branch

The email generated when a service clears in Local Dispatch is now sent to the personnel associated to the branch of the service instead of the branch of the order. Refer to Automatic Email Service for more information. (8562)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R12

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R12)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R12)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R12)

 

 

Version 2017 R11

 

RELEASE DATE: 5/22/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

 

New Product Features

 

Release Enhancements

2

Release Fixes

 

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

 

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, the development environment of MoversSuite is no longer compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite.

 

Office & Industrial

 

Scope of Work group sorting order corrected

The groupings within the Scope of Work section within the Job Information tab now sort based on the Sort Order assigned to the group within the Service Group Setup. (8878)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

Cannot void Work Ticket with Actuals

MoversSuite now prevents you from voiding a work ticket if actuals are entered for the service. Now, to void a work ticket you must remove all associated actuals. (8621)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R11)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R11)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R11)

 

 

 

 

Version 2017 R10

 

RELEASE DATE: 5/8/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

4

New Product Features

1

Release Enhancements

2

Release Fixes

4

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

5

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

COMING SOON: Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, scheduled for release on May 22, 2017, the development environment of MoversSuite will no longer be compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

This section lists any new features added to MoversSuite.

 

Remove multiple items from an invoice

 

You now have the option to select multiple invoice items and remove them all at once from the invoice.

 

Figure 73: New Complete Invoice

 

 

To do so, select records by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on records individually or by pressing and holding the SHIFT key and selecting a range of records. Once your selection is made, press the key to remove items.

 

Of note, you can only remove items in this manner if they are not part of group nor an ad hoc entry. To remove items belonging to a group, you must un-group the items first.

 

Use the  button to remove any ad hoc line items.

 

SUMMARY (8672)

Ability to remove multiple line items at a single time added to New Complete Invoice.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

New Complete Invoice

 

 

 

International Orders User Interface Updates (Phase V)

 

Location Name and Location Code Added

 

Two new fields are available within the Customs Inspection Information screen allowing you to document the Location Code and Location Name of an inspection.

 

Figure 74: Customs Inspection Information

 

View the Customs Inspection Information topic for detailed information. (8834)

 

 

International Transportation Mode Updates

 

The External Codes associated to the Transportation Mode have been updated to reflect recent UniGroup changes. The supported codes are now included as default mappings to the UniGroup International interface. Transportation Mode Setup now offers the following default codes:

 

Transportation Mode

UniGroup External Code

Air

AIR

Full Container

FULL_CONTAINER_LOAD

Lift Van

LESS_THAN_CONTAINER_LOAD

Overland

OVERLAND

Vehicle

VEHICLE

 

The Transportation Mode is set for an International Orders record on the Shipping Information tab. (8848)

 

International Container Size Updates

 

The External Codes associated to the Container Size have been updated to reflect recent UniGroup changes. The supported codes are now included as default mappings to the UniGroup International interface. Container Size Setup now offers the following default codes:

 

Container Size

UniGroup External Code

20

CONTAINER_20_FOOT

24

CONTAINER_24_FOOT

24 High Cube

HIGH_CUBE_CONTAINER_24_FOOT

40

CONTAINER_40_FOOT

40 High Cube

HIGH_CUBE_CONTAINER_40_FOOT

45

CONTAINER_45_FOOT

53

CONTAINER_53_FOOT

 

The container Size is set for an International Orders record within Add Container screen accessible through the Container/Lift Van/Airbox Information tab. (8849)

 

International Container Load Type Updates

 

The External Codes associated to the Container Load Type have been updated to reflect recent UniGroup changes. The supported codes are now included as default mappings to the UniGroup International interface. Container Load Type Setup now offers the following default codes:

 

Container Load Type

UniGroup External Code

Lift Van

LIFT_VAN

Looe

LOOSE_LOADED

 

The container Load Type is set for an International Orders record within Add Container screen accessible through the Container/Lift Van/Airbox Information tab. (8850)

 

 

SUMMARY (8834, 8848, 8849, 8850)

Location Name and Location Code added to the Customs Inspection Information screen.

External Code values updated within Container Load Type Setup, Container Size Setup, and Transportation Mode Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Container Load Type Setup

Container Size Setup

Customs Inspection Information

Transportation Mode Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R10

 

 

 

 

Overtime rules applied to Labor in Job Costing

 

You can now apply overtime rules to costing within Job Costing. The Overtime Hourly Wage and Double Time Hourly Wage settings are available to employees within the Accounting tab within Personnel Setup.

 

Figure 75: Accounting tab in Personnel Setup

 

MoversSuite now applies the overtime or double rate for the Cost amount in the same manner as it does when computing the Rated Amount. The rate applied from the Personnel Setup record is based on what is defined within the Rate Schedule for Labor to compute the Cost that displays within the Job Costing screen. Example: If an employee works two hours of overtime at $25/hr. (see Overtime Hourly Wage in Figure 75), then the Labor cost computes for the employee as $50.00.

 

Figure 76: Single Order tab in Job Costing

 

Note: If the Overtime Hourly Wage or Double Time Hourly Wage are not set, yet the Regular Hourly Wage is, MoversSuite computes the overtime rate as 1.5 times the regular rate and the double rate at 2 times the regular rate. In other words, you can just set the Regular Hourly Wage and the application will automatically compute the overtime or double time for you (based on the 1.5 or 2 multiplier).

 

Read more about this subject within the Job Costing and Job Costing Rating topics.

 

SUMMARY (8674, 8675)

Renamed Hourly Wage to Regular Hourly Wage and added Overtime Hourly Wage and Double Time Hourly Wage within the Accounting tab within Personnel Setup.

Modified the Cost for Labor to utilize overtime or double rates set for an employee.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Job Costing

Personnel Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R10

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists any enhancements made to MoversSuite.

 

Cost column visible only to managers in Job Costing

 

The Cost column within the Job Costing screen is now visible only by those assigned as managers to the Job Costing security module. The reason for this change is to provide more security around employee compensation.

 

If you have manager access, you can view the Cost column for orders under any branch within the Single Order and Compare Orders tabs.

 

Figure 77: Job Costing

 

Likewise, without manager access, you can still view the Gross Margin and Profit/Loss information but you cannot see the specific cost data within either Job Costing tab.

 

Figure 78: Job Costing

 

Set the manager access by checking the Allow Manager Privileges flag for the Job Costing Security Module within Security Profile Setup. Only one branch needs manager privileges to access the Cost information for orders under any branch of service.

 

 

View the Job Costing topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8258)

Cost column visible to only managers of the Job Costing security module.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Job Costing

Job Costing Setup and Administration

Security Modules

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite.

 

Agents

 

Market removed for Booking Agent

The Market setting is deemed unnecessary for the booker, so it has been removed from the Booking Agent section within the Agents tab. (8856)

 

 

SIT Information

 

Agent/Carrier contact title added to Stored At selector

When associating a contact to an Agent or Carrier type for the Stored At setting within SIT Information, you now have the title of the person along with their name to assist you in making a selection.

 

 

(8857)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R10

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R10)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R10)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R10)

 

 

 

 

Version 2017 R09

 

RELEASE DATE: 4/24/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

10

New Product Features

 

Release Enhancements

6

Release Fixes

14

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

9

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

COMING SOON: Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, scheduled for release on May 22, 2017, the development environment of MoversSuite will no longer be compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

Import Quote into Invoice as it Appears in Quotes

 

Two new options are available that allow you to copy an entire quote or just the detail items of the quote directly into an invoice as they appear on the quote. Both options are available through a right-click on a Quote revenue import item within the New Complete Invoice screen.

 

Figure 79: New Complete Invoice

 

Selecting Import as Quoted populates the invoice items with all items on the quote, including groups, directly as it appears on the quote.

 

The example below illustrates a Quote group that we wish to import as is into an invoice.

 

Figure 80: Quote tab

 

Choosing the Import as Quoted option adds the quote group and items in the same order.

Figure 81: Invoice Items section within New Complete Invoice (example)

 

Selecting the Import Items as Quoted option also populates the invoice items but without the groupings that may be in effect.

 

Figure 82: Invoice Items section within New Complete Invoice (example)

 

Refer to the Quotes item within the Source Description listing within the New Complete Invoice topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8670)

Right-click options of Import as Quoted and Import Items as Quoted added to New Complete Invoice.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

New Complete Invoice

 

 

 

 

 

Capture Reason, Date, and Person that Cancelled an Order

 

When you cancel an order, the application can be configured to also request a reason for the cancellation.

 

Figure 83: Cancel Order Reason

 

This feature is tied to a new flag set for the Order Status. Setting the Is Cancelled Status on any Order Status Setup record instructs MoversSuite to capture the reason through the new Cancel Order Reason dialog when the MSS Order Status is changed to the particular status value.

 

Figure 84: Order Status Setup (example)

 

The cancellation and reason are documented within Order History.

 

SUMMARY (8737)

Is Cancelled Status flag added to Order Status Setup.

New Cancel Order Reason dialog available when status is changed that has the Is Cancelled Status flag set.

Order History documents the reason the order was cancelled through the Changed field item of Order Cancelled Reason.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Cancel Order Reason

MSS Order Status

Order History

Order Status Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R09

 

 

 

 

 

International Orders User Interface Update (Phase IV)

 

Estimated Cutoff Dates Removed

 

Two unnecessary estimates for cutoff dates have been removed. Inland Departure Cutoff and Port of Sailing Cutoff within the Shipping Information tab no longer have an Estimated column (Actual only). These dates have been removed as Task Dependency Dates and as Create Duplicate Order fields.

 

Figure 85: Shipping Dates section within the Shipping Information tab

 

(8831)

 

 

Origin Port added to Vessel/Voyage/Flight Information

 

The Origin Port is available through the Vessel/Voyage and Flight Information section on the Shipping Information tab.

 

Figure 86: Shipping Information

 

When you add a line (leg) to this section, the Origin Port defaults to the value set for the Origin Port set for the order (located above the Status Dates). If you add additional legs to the voyage or flight, then the application defaults the Origin Port to what is set for the Destination Port on the leg above the line.

 

You also receive a warning if you happen to enter the same Origin Port twice. This is to assist you in avoiding a circular route.

 

Figure 87: Duplicate voyage/flight warning

 

(8824)

 

 

 

 

 

Estimated and Actual Pickup and Delivery Dates

 

You can now specify estimated and actual dates for Pickup and Delivery locations within the Pickup/Delivery Information screen.

 

Figure 88: Pickup/Delivery Information

 

These dates are also available as the following Task Dependency Dates:

Booking Number Pickup Estimated Date

Booking Number Pickup Actual Date
Booking Number Delivery Estimated Date

Booking Number Delivery Actual Date

 

(8829)

 

 

 

Customs Inspection Information

 

The ability to document customs inspection data is available through the Customs Inspection Information button on the Shipping Information tab.

 

Figure 89: Shipping Information

 

Pressing this button opens the Customs Inspection Information screen, providing you an area to document the inspection.

 

Figure 90: Customs Inspection Information

 

New setup areas are available allowing your company to customize the Inspection Location and Inspection Type. The International category within MoversSuite Administration now offers the Customs Inspection Location Setup to establish the values available through the Inspection Location setting and the Customs Inspection Location Setup to define Inspection Type values.

 

Both setup areas allow for you to map to codes supported by external systems. MoversSuite provides default values anticipated to support uploads and downloads from the UniGroup International system.

 

The inspection dates are also available as the following Task Dependency Dates:

Customs Inspection Start Estimated Date

Customs Inspection Start Actual Date

Customs Inspection End Estimated Date

Customs Inspection End Actual Date

 

The following new roles are available to Admin Profile Setup records:

International > Customs Inspection Location

International > Customs Inspection Type

 

(8731, 8744)

 

 

 

International Auto Register Flag

 

IMPORTANT: This feature is not yet fully implement and the auto upload of an international order is not yet available.

 

A new flag is available that is assignable to move types. The International Auto Register flag within Move Type Setup instructs MoversSuite, when checked, to automatically upload an UniGroup order when it is booked within the International Orders module.

 

Figure 91: Move Type Setup

 

When this feature is available, in a future release of MoversSuite, the application will automatically upload the order when the following occurs:

International Auto Register flag set on the Type of Move

Authority on the order is Van Line

Order is booked through the International Orders module

 

More on this feature in a future release of MoversSuite. (8828)

 

 

Link Personnel Records to Credentials of an External Application

 

Administrators can associate the login credentials of an employee to those required by an upload process to an external application. These credentials are needed to identify the employee performing the upload.

 

An Interface section is available within the Interface Mapping in Personnel Setup that allows the administrator to link the credentials to a particular interface, such as those needed to access the UniGroup Trafficking System.

 

Figure 92: Interface Mapping tab within Personnel Setup

 

Once an interface is established, press the Credentials button to add the User Name and Password for the disparate system.

 

Figure 93: Credentials entry prompt

 

Credentials are encrypted within MoversSuite.

 

Administrators can access the Password option within the credentials of an employee if they are assigned to the XML Interface Credentials Passwords role in Admin Profile Setup. This role lists under the Personnel category. If they are not assigned to this role, the can still enter a User Name through the credentials prompt.

 

Refer to the Interface Mapping section within Personnel Setup for more information.

 

(8825)

 

 

SUMMARY (8731, 8744, 8824, 8825, 8828, 8829, 8831)

Estimated cutoff dates removed from the Shipping Information tab.

Origin Port added to Vessel/Voyage and Flight Information.

International Auto Register flag added to Move Type Setup.

Estimated and actual dates added to Pickup and Delivery locations within Pickup/Delivery Information.

Customs Inspection Information screen added.

Link employee to credentials on an external system within Personnel Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Admin Profile Setup

Customs Inspection Information

Move Type Setup

Pickup/Delivery Information

Shipping Information

Task Dependency Dates

Vessel/Voyage and Flight Information

Schema Changes Version 2017R09

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SIRVA QPD Integration

 

MoversConnect communicates directly with the SIRVA QPD system using a RESTful service that allows event monitoring to automatically update information in MoversSuite. Refer to the SIRVA QPD Integration topic for more information.

 

Additionally, two system phone types have been added to the list available within Shipper Phone Type Setup. Destination Other and Origin Other are available for assignment within MoversSuite, such as through the contact information found within the Name, Address, Phone tab. These two types are also included in the data utilized by the Pass Thru Connector and by the SIRVA QPD Integration.

 

SUMMARY (8746)

SIRVA QPD Integration implemented.

Destination Other and Origin Other options added to the list of those supported by Pass Thru Connector, Shipper Phone Type Setup, and SIRVA QPD Integration.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Pass Thru Connector XML Database Schema (XSD)

Pass Thru Connector Upload Format

Shipper Phone Type Setup

SIRVA QPD Integration

SIRVA QPD Download Content

SIRVA QPD Integration Setup and Administration

XML System Setup (SIRVA)

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administration

 

Timeout error on Data Warehouse Refresh

You no longer receive an error when performing a manual Data Warehouse Refresh. This issue appears to have only occur when MoversSuite Administration is opened through the Tools Menu. (8837)

 

 

Local Services

 

Remove Extra Stops on Voided or Cancelled Services

If a service is set to Void or Cancelled, you can now remove any stop associated to the service by deleting the record through the Extra Stops tab. Prior to this release, the application prevented you from removing stops associated to the voided or cancelled services. (8595)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

Remove Crew from Services with Actuals

Crew can be removed from a service with actuals provided the specific assignment the person is assigned does not have any actuals. Prior to this release, if there were any actuals set for the service, whether they tie directly to the employee or not, the application prevents you from removing this employee. (8231)

 

 

Payment Management

 

Payment Application Timeout Issue

Using Payment Application no longer produces an error. An error indicating that “The timeout period elapsed prior to completion of the operation…” has been addressed by updating the table structure of the RM20201 table to include an index, making searching more efficient on the Dynamics GP database. (8745)

 

 

MoversSuite Crew Mobile Application

 

Auto Synchronization of Crew Settings

Mobile API Setup now auto synchronizes with MoversConnect when one of the following flags change:

Activate MSCrew

Activate Crew Time

Crew Time for Crew Lead Only

 

This function can be performed manually through the Verify/Synchronize all mobile data with MoversConnect function.

 

When the Mobile API Setup data is synchronized with MoversConnect, either manually or automatically, then the date and time of the sync displays within the Last Synced with MoversConnect On field (also within the Mobile API Setup screen).

 

Figure 94: Mobile API Setup tab within MoversConnect Setup

 

(8803)

 

 

Revenue Entry

 

Third party invoice no longer duplicated

An issue was occurring when multiple reversals spread out over time were lumped together into a single third party invoice transaction. Now the application locates the correct transaction and creates new documents for any transaction that is not already assigned a Dynamics GP document number. (8552)

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R09

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R09)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R09)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R09)

 

 

Version 2017 R08

 

RELEASE DATE: 4/10/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

10

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

4

Release Fixes

29

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

9

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

With the release of MoversSuite Version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later. (8638)

 

 

IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5

For all UniGroup agents, UniGroup requires IBM MQ Client 8.0.0.5. If you upgrade on your own and want to download this latest version of IBM MQ Client, then you can do so through this link: http://www-01.ibm.com/support/docview.wss?uid=swg24037500#1.

 

 

COMING SOON: Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, scheduled for release on May 22, 2017, the development environment of MoversSuite will no longer be compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Timeout error on Data Warehouse Refresh

Users noticed an error when performing a manual Data Warehouse Refresh. The refresh occurs however a timeout error ensued. This issue appears to only occur when MoversSuite Administration is opened through the Tools Menu. (8837)

 

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

Log into MoversSuite via Windows Authentication

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R08 or later.

 

With this release is the ability to open MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration without login by using the account information you use when logging into your Windows environment.

 

The first time you log into MoversSuite after upgrading to this release, the application captures your credentials and associates them to your Windows domain user. The next time you log into MoversSuite, the credentials are passed along to MoversSuite automatically without the need for you to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

Logging into MoversSuite Administration is under Windows Authentication as well.

 

This features works everywhere you reference your Windows domain account. For example, if you switch to a different computer but log into Windows with the same credentials, then you are automatically logged into MoversSuite or MoversSuite Administration.

 

Administrators can see which Domain User Name is associated to a Personnel Setup record through the User tab. They also have the option to Remove domain user association for any user through this setup. This option provides the ability to remove the Windows Domain User Name associated to the record. This is useful if a person needs to change their domain affiliation, i.e. change their user name.

 

Figure 95: Personnel Setup

 

There can be only one user record associated to a domain user. If you attempt to log into MoversSuite on an environment associated to a different domain user, you receive the following error: “The provided user is already mapped to a different Windows Domain User account. Please see your system administrator.”

 

Figure 96: Existing map for a domain user error

 

Refer to the Windows Authentication topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8638)

Remove domain user association and Windows Domain User added to Personnel Setup.

Windows Authentication implemented.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Personnel Setup

Shipping Information

Windows Authentication

Schema Changes Version 2017R08

 

 

 

 

 

International Orders User Interface Update (Phase III)

 

More fields and features are available to support an upload for UniGroup international forwarders. Many of these fields and features are available for usage outside of the International Orders module, as well.

 

Auto Information Update

 

The Move Information tab now features fields to capture the Color, Mileage, and Cubic Feet of an auto.

 

Figure 97: Move Information tab

 

Additionally, the Auto Class field now maps to an external interface. Refer to the Interface Item section within Auto Class Setup. (8725)

 

 

Quote Connected to Van Line

 

If an accepted quote connects to an external interface, e.g. van line, through an upload or download process, then a caption of “Connected” display in the header section of the Quote tab. This status indicates that the quote can be updated through the external interface.

 

Figure 98: Quote tab

 

Only one quote per order can be connected per order. This feature is only available from the Quote tab within International Orders. (8754)

 

 

Bill To added to Quote

 

You can now specify a Bill To as either Agent, National Account, or Shipper under the Service Provider information on a Quote. This feature allows you to designate the entity being billed for service.

 

Figure 99: Service Provider section within the details of a quote

 

Refer to the Service Provider section within the Quote topic for more information. (8752)

 

 

 

International Financial Information added

 

A new screen is available allowing you to capture financial data specific to an International Orders record. The new Financial Information screen is available through the Financial Information button on the Shipping Information tab.

 

Figure 100: Financial Information screen

 

Two new setup areas have been added to support data within the Financial Information screen. The Valuation Declined Reason Setup allows you to define which options are available within the Reason Declined field and the Value Type Setup provides options for the Value Type setting. Both are found under the International category within MoversSuite Administration.

 

Both new setup areas allow you to map to external interface codes.

 

The following new roles are available to Admin Profile Setup records:

International > Valuation Declined Reason

International > Value Type

 

See the Financial Information topic for more information. (8750)

 

 

XML Mapping added to Container Load Type

 

The Container Load Type Setup now offers the ability to link types to External Codes supported by an external interface. Refer to the Interface Item section within the Container Load Type Setup. (8749)

 

Redesigned Booking Number Screen

 

The Booking Number screen has been renamed to Pickup/Delivery Information and is available for both types of Transportation Mode: Air and Sea. The redesigned screen features the following additions:

    Live Load Unload flag

    Equipment Returned flag

    Transit section

    Location Type and Location Code added to Pickup and Delivery sections

 

Figure 101: Pickup/Delivery Information screen

 

Access this screen through the icon adjacent the Booking Number/HWAB field.

 

Figure 102: Access to the Pickup/Delivery Information screen

 

See the Pickup/Delivery Information topic for more information. (8741)

 

SUMMARY (8725, 8728, 8729, 8741, 8749, 8750, 8752, 8754, 8814)

Fields added to the Move Information tab.

Interface mapping added to Auto Class Setup.

“Connected” indicator added to the Quote tab.

Bill To added to the Service Provider on a Quote.

Financial Information added to the Shipping Information tab.

Interface mapping added to Container Load Type Setup.

Booking Number screen redesigned and renamed to Pickup/Delivery Information.

Valuation Declined Reason Setup added.

Value Type Setup added.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Auto Class Setup

Container Load Type Setup

Financial Information

Job Information

Move Information

Pickup/Delivery Information

Quote

Service Group Setup

Shipping Information

Schema Changes Version 2017R08

 

 

 

 

 

Building Constraints available for Office & Industrial orders

 

Available within the Job Information tab of an Office & Industrial order is the ability to specify Building Constraints.

 

Figure 103: Building Constraints within the Job Information tab

 

Selecting a Location from those established within the Contacts and Locations tab populates the data initially. You can then edit what displays within the Cross Street, Service Entrance and Site Notes sections.

 

A constraints section allows you to clarify any requirements that display for the site. Editing options here include the ability to confirm the constraint by placing a check in the Yes column and by entering any needed notes.

 

The application stores the constraints for each Location set within the Contacts and Locations tab.

 

 

 

New Office & Industrial Setup Areas for Building Constraints

 

Two new setup areas are available under the Office & Industrial category in MoversSuite Administration. These setup areas allow you to define preset data that can link to Locations that feed Building Constraints.

 

Figure 104: Category listing within MoversSuite Administration

 

Setup areas allow you to provide the list of constraints. Options within the Building Constraints Setup allow you to define the text of the constraint, indicate whether you want a checkbox for the item, sort order placement of the item, and provide any default notes.

 

Figure 105: Sample Building Constraints record

 

Under the Building Setup, you can define records for each building involved in your O&I operations. Provide detailed site information using this setup.

 

Figure 106: Sample Building record

 

Link buildings to locations through the Building option within Add/Edit Order Location available through the Contacts and Locations tab. The data set within Building Setup is referenced as the default site information within the Building Constraints tab, when the corresponding Location is selected. This information can be updated for each order.

 

Figure 107: Add/Edit Order Location screen

 

You can also link buildings to locations tied to Account Profile Setup records through the Add Account Profile Preset screen.

 

Figure 108: Sample Preset Address within Account Profile Setup

 

Refer to the Office & Industrial topic and to the Building Constraints section within the Job Information topic for more information.

 

The following new roles are available to Admin Profile Setup records:

Office & Industrial > Building Constraints

Office & Industrial > Buildings

 

 

SUMMARY (8337)

Building Constraints functionality added to the Job Information tab.

Building Setup added.

Building Constraints Setup added.

Admin Profile Setup roles added.

Building setting added to the Add/Edit Order Location screen and to Add Account Profile Preset.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Account Profile Setup

Add Account Profile Preset

Add/Edit Order Location

Building Setup

Building Constraints Setup

Job Information

Schema Changes Version 2017R08

 

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Reorder invoice items by description

 

A right-click option is available within the New Complete Invoice screen that allows you to automatically reorder the items based on the description.

 

Figure 109: Invoice details section within New Complete Invoice

 

The right-click option of Re-order Invoice Lines by Description allows you to change the sorting on items and groups based on the description. The function sorts all items and groups by the Description column in descending alphanumeric order. Items belong to a group cannot be reordered.

 

SUMMARY (8671)

Right-click option of Re-order Invoice Lines by Description added to the line item listing within the New Complete Invoice screen.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

New Complete Invoice

 

 

 

 

Enable/disable Duplicate Order functionality

 

An option is now available within the System Wide Options that allows you to turn on or off the ability to duplicate an order. The Enable Duplicate Order option, when checked, provides you with the ability to select Duplicate Order from the New menu. When this option is not checked, the option is not available.

 

Figure 110: System Wide Options

 

The Enable Duplicate Order option applies to all users. Refer to Create Duplicate Order for related information.

 

SUMMARY (8656)

Right-click option of Re-order Invoice Lines by Description added to the line item listing within the New Complete Invoice screen.

Enable Duplicate Order option added to the System Wide Options.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Create Duplicate Order

System Wide Options

Schema Changes Version 2017R08

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Agents

 

Agent Find dialog no longer resizable

The Agent Find no longer allows you to resize the screen. Prior to this change, if you changed the size of the screen (using click and drag), then OK and Cancel buttons did not resize and caused confusion. (8793)

 

 

Field Requirements

 

Field Requirements recognize Customer Number

The system now recognizes the Customer Number for field within Field Requirements on the On Book requirement. Prior to this release, if the Customer Number was required and set on the order, you still received the “Unable to book the order until the following fields are set” error. (8815)

 

 

Office & Industrial

 

Enable Estimate and Actual Amount fields

The Estimate Amount and Actual Amount fields on the Billing Information tab are now visible and can be updated for Office & Industrial moves. Prior to this change, these two fields were not available for O&I orders. (8785)

 

 

Quotes

 

Quote Number width expanded in drop-down selector

The column that displays the quote number when choosing a quote from the list of existing ones has been expanded to allow viewing of larger quote numbers. (8636)

 

 

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R08

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R08)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R08)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R08)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R07

 

RELEASE DATE: 3/27/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

6

New Product Features

 

Release Enhancements

2

Release Fixes

11

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

5

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Coming soon: Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

Anticipated for release in MoversSuite version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R07 or later. (8638)

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Coming soon: Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, scheduled for release on May 22, 2017, the development environment of MoversSuite will no longer be compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

International Orders User Interface Updates (Phase II)

 

Several new fields, along with new setup options, have been added to MoversSuite with this, our second, installment of the changes to support an upload for UniGroup international forwarders. The changes revolve around the Shipping Information and Container/Lift Van/Airbox Information tabs. These changes are needed to support an UniGroup International Upload.

 

Shipping Information updates

 

New fields are available within the Shipping Information tab, which was also reorganized to accommodate the new fields.

 

Figure 111: Shipping Information tab

 

The following fields are now available through the Shipping Information tab:

Inland Port of Departure

Inland Port of Arrival

Security Filing Confirmation

Port of Sailing Cut-Off (Estimated/Actual Dates)

Inland Departure Cut-Off (Estimated/Actual Dates)

Inland Departure Date (Estimated/Actual Dates)

Inland Arrival Date (Estimated/Actual Dates)

Delivery to Perm Storage (Estimated/Actual Dates)

 

New date fields are available as Task Dependency Dates as well. The following dependency dates have been added to the system:

Delivery to Perm Stg Actual Date

Delivery to Perm Stg Estimated Date

Inland Arrival Actual Date

Inland Arrival Estimated Date

Inland Departure Actual Date

Inland Departure Estimated Date

Inland Departure Cut-Off Actual Date

Inland Departure Cut-Off Estimated Date

Port of Sailing Cut-Off Actual Date

Port of Sailing Cut-Off Estimated Date

 

Additionally, the now Bill of Lading Consignee data includes the company name (either Agency Company, or Shipper) and Email of the contact person. This screen is available by pressing the  icon next to the Consign BOL.

 

Figure 112: Bill of Lading Consignee screen

 

The following fields are now available through the Bill of Lading Consignee screen:

Agency, Company, or Shipper (depending on the Consign To type)

Email

 

Two new Letter Management Bookmarks are available for these two new fields, both referenced under the International bookmark group:

Consignee Company

Consignee Email

 

 

Container/Lift Van/Airbox Information updates

 

Added to the list of items captured when adding a container include a second seal number and an Auto in Container flag. Additionally, the Size field no allows you to select from predefined values.

 

Figure 113: Add Container screen

 

The following fields are now available through the Add Container screen:

Seal Number 2

Auto in Container

 

Seal Number has been renamed to Seal Number 1.

 

Size has been changed from a text entry field to a drop-down selector displaying options defined within Container Size Setup. Please note that if your company utilized the Size setting on prior releases, then MoversSuite matches them to those set as standard sizes offered by UniGroup. If no match is made, then the non-matching Size type is saved to the Container Size Setup but will be marked as Inactive; Inactive Size values will continue to show for existing orders and, if you feel you still need these Size values, you can turn off the Inactive flag and they will be available within the Add Container screen.

 

You can find detailed field information within the Add Container, Bill of Lading Consignee, and Shipping Information topics.

 

Look for additional support for the UniGroup International Upload in future releases of MoversSuite.

 

SUMMARY (8723, 8763, 8733, 8734)

Fields added to the Shipping Information tab.

Fields added to the Bill of Lading Consignee screen.

Fields added to the Add Container screen.

Container Size Setup added.

Letter Management Bookmarks added.

Task Dependency Dates added.

Interface mappings added to Direction Setup and Transportation Mode Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Add Container

Container Size Setup

Direction Setup

Bill of Lading Consignee

Letter Management Bookmarks

Port Setup

Shipping Information

Transportation Mode Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R07

 

 

 

 

 

Office & Industrial Scope of Work

 

Available to Office & Industrial orders is the Scope of Work setting within the Job Information tab. This setting is available through the like-named tab. In Edit mode, you can check the appropriate items needed for the move as it applies to either Mover, Client, or if the service does not apply (N/A).

 

Figure 114: Scope of Work section within Job Information tab

 

The Scope of Work is customized through the Service Group Setup, which lists under a new category titled Office & Industrial within MoversSuite AdministrationNote: A new category (Office & Industrial) and role (Service Group) are available within Admin Profile Setup to assign to admin personnel to grant them access to the Office & Industrial > Service Group.

 

Within Service Group Setup, you can establish the groups that display along with each item within that group. Sorting options allow you to customize the order in which the groups and service items appear within the Scope of Work tab.

 

Figure 115: Service Group setup

 

A Scope of Work Letter Management Bookmarks item will be available along with additional support for Office & Industrial move in an upcoming release of MoversSuite.

 

SUMMARY (8338)

Scope of Work added to the Job Information tab.

Service Group Setup added a new Office & Industrial category within MoversSuite Administration.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Job Information

Service Group Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R07

 

 

 

 

 

SIT Information User Interface Updates

 

The SIT Information section, as part of the SIT/Recurring Billing tab, has been updated to allow the addition of several fields.

 

The SIT Information section now offers two tabs for Origin and Destination.

 

New field available to both the Origin and Destination tabs includes the following:

Contacts at Storage Facility (along with email option)

SIT # Requested (date and time)

SIT # Returned (date and time)

SIT # to Agent (date and time)

DPS Arrival (date and time)

 

Figure 116: SIT Information - Origin tab

 

New field available to just the Destination tab includes the following:

Date of Arrival (along with Overflow flag)

DA Notification (date and time)

TC Notification (date and time)

 

Figure 117: SIT Information - Destination tab

 

 

Refer to the SIT Information topic for details on these new fields.

 

This data is part of the effort to supply more information when exchanging data with external systems, such as Suddath.

 

 

SUMMARY (8685)

Fields and tabs added to the SIT Information.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

SIT Information

Schema Changes Version 2017R07

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

MSCrew Mobile Application

 

Applied correct time zone conversion for crew date selection

The correct time zone conversion process is now applied within the MoversConnect API Service for the service date selection available to MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application users. Prior to this fix, the punch times available were off approximately one day. (8791)

 

Crew lead can approve mobile user punches

Crew leads no longer receive an exception error when approving MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application user time. (8792)

 

 

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R07

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R07)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R07)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R07)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R06

 

RELEASE DATE: 3/13/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

7

New Product Features

 

Release Enhancements

5

Release Fixes

14

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

5

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Coming soon: Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

Anticipated for release in MoversSuite version 2017 R08 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R07 or later. (8638)

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Coming soon: Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, scheduled for release on May 22, 2017, the development environment of MoversSuite will no longer be compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

International Orders User Interface Updates (Phase I)

 

As part of the initial changes to support a shipment information upload from UniGroup for international forwarders, this version includes additional fields to the International Orders module and to MoversSuite Administration.

 

Bill To fields added

 

The Billing Information tab now includes the Bill International To and Bill To Agent fields. The two fields are available when viewing the order through the International Orders module.

 

Figure 118: Billing Information tab through International Orders

 

Bill International To allows you to assign either Agent or National Account to determine which to include in an UniGroup International Upload; Agent refers to the Bill To Agent and National Account references the National Account on the order (also set within the Billing Information tab).

 

Options for the Bill To Agent are the same options available when assigning a party through the Agents tab. The list of available agents is from those defined within Agent Setup.

 

Bill International To and Bill To agent are included in the UniGroup International Upload scheduled to be available in an upcoming release of MoversSuite.

 

 

 

Fields added to Shipping Information

 

Service Type and Forwarding Agent are available from the Shipping Information tab.

 

Figure 119: Shipping Information tab

 

The Service Type documents the type of movement expected on the order. The values available are defined within the new Service Type Setup (International Orders). The setup area includes the ability to map types to codes supported by UniGroup.

 

Document the Forwarding Agent of the order by choosing one from the list defined within Agent Setup.

 

Service Type is included in the UniGroup International Upload scheduled to be available in an upcoming release of MoversSuite.

 

 

 

International Region added

 

The new Region Setup allows you link coordinators to a region which is mapped to codes support by UniGroup.

 

Figure 120: Region Setup

 

The upload process identifies a region based on the assigned coordinator. Link coordinators to the supported region by adding new Employee Items. Only those with a Labor Type of “coor” on their Personnel Setup record are available for assignment.

 

Look for additional support for the UniGroup International Upload in future releases of MoversSuite.

 

SUMMARY (8706, 8707, 8708, 8709)

Bill International To and Bill To Agent added to the Billing Information tab on an International Orders record.

Service Type and Forwarding Agent added to the Shipment Information tab.

Region Setup added.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Agent Setup

Billing Information

International Orders

Region Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R06

Shipment Information

UniGroup International Interface

UniGroup International Upload

 

 

 

 

 

Agent Markets now available

 

A new Agent Market Setup is available allowing your company to define markets serviced by agents and link the market to an external application for data exchange through the Standard XML Pipeline. The service areas are established within the Agent Market Setup.

 

Figure 121: Agent Market Setup

 

The types set within Agent Market Setup can link to Agent Setup records. Manage these markets through the new Agent Market Item section within Agent Setup.

 

Figure 122: Agent Setup

 

The list of markets associated to an agent are available as options within the new Market field on the Agents tab. If only one market is assigned to the agent record, then the application automatically set this market by default.

 

Figure 123: Agents tab

 

There is no functionality within MoversSuite that utilizes the Agent Market assignments. These changes were added to support functionality in disparate systems, such as Suddath Van Lines. In such, MoversSuite has made available several new MoversSuite API Service methods that all companies can utilize to add, update, and remove Agent Market records, refer to the Agent Market API methods section (below).

 

 

Agent Market API methods

 

Six new methods are available through MoversSuite API Service allowing you to make changes to Agent and Agent Market records via the Standard XML Pipeline. The new methods list below and are described within the Agent API topic:

 

Get Markets Request

Add Market Request

Delete Market Request

Update Market Request

Add Agent Market Request

Delete Agent Market Request

 

The Get Agent By ID or PriKey Request now includes any markets associated to an Agent Setup record.

 

SUMMARY (8682, 8683)

Haul Own Authority and Haul Van Line Authority flags added to the Agent Setup.

Added Agent Market Setup.

Added Agent Market Item section to Agent Setup.

Added Market field to the Agents tab.

New and updated Agent API methods are now available.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Add Agent Market Request

Add Market Request

Agent API

Agent Setup

Agent Market Setup

Agents

Delete Agent Market Request

Delete Market Request

Get Agent By ID or PriKey Request

Get Markets Request

Haul As Setup

MoversSuite API Service

Update Market Request

Schema Changes Version 2017R06

 

 

 

 

 

Set Haul As option automatically

 

The application now sets the Haul As option on the Hauling Agent of an order based on what is set within administration. The application compares new flags within the Haul As Setup to similar flags set within Agent Setup.

 

Figure 124: Haul As Setup

 

The application compares what is set on the new fields of Own Authority and Van Line Authority within the Haul As Setup record to the Haul Own Authority and Haul Van Line Authority flags now available within Agent Setup.

 

Figure 125: Agent Setup

 

Once you select a Hauling Agent within the Agents tab, the application produces a list of available Haul As options based on what is matched. For example, if the agent has the Haul Van Line Authority flag set, then Haul As records with the Van Line Authority flag are available as Haul As options.

 

Figure 126: Hauling Agent section within the Agents tab

 

Similarly, if both Haul options are checked for the agent, then all Haul As options are available.

 

Please note that if there is only one Haul As Setup record available that qualifies for the agent, then this one record defaults for the Haul As within the Agents tab.

 

The impetus behind this change is to include the Haul As as part of van line download (Suddath Van Lines). Any van line download that includes the Hauling Agent now includes the Haul As identifier as well.

 

The Get Agent By ID or PriKey Request now includes the Haul Own Authority and Haul Van Line Authority flags along with any markets associated to an Agent Setup record. View the Agent API topic for more information.

 

Additionally, if the download updates the shipment status (Shipment Status History) to reflect that the driver is removed from the order, then Haul As setting is cleared.

 

SUMMARY (8684)

Own Authority and Van Line Authority flags added to the Haul As Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Agent API

Agent Setup

Agents

Get Agent By ID or PriKey Request

Haul As Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R06

 

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Office & Industrial

 

Email function disabled when no contact address present

If a contact on an Office & Industrial order does not have an email address associated to their record, then the email option available through a right-click menu is disabled. Additionally, if a new contact is added to the order and no email address links to the person, then selecting the Email option opens a new mail message but does not set the recipient. Refer to the Contacts and Locations topic for more information. (8713)

 

 

Recurring Billing

 

Emails sent during Recurring Billing run

The correct identifier has been added to the email address of emails sent out as part of a Recurring Billing run. Utilizing a standard email system, such as Microsoft Outlook, the SMTP identifier is now included with the email address. (8619)

 

 

Report Viewer

 

Email options added for multiple-record reports

The Email option within the Report Viewer now offers three choices for sending out emails when multiple reports list:

 

 

Send all selected reports as a single email

This option creates one email message that includes all selected reports as an attachment to the message.

 

Send each selected report out as a separate email (review each email)

Choosing this option produces separate emails for each selected report. It opens a window for you to review the message and the attached report before sending it out. Once you press Send, the next email window opens. This continues until emails are sent for all selected reports. Note: With this option a blind copy (BCC) of the email is sent to the person sending the email (you).

 

Send each selected report out as a separate email in silent mode (no review)

This option instructs the viewer to send out separate emails for each selected report. It runs this operation in the background and updates the progress bar to provide you an indication of when all emails are sent. You will not be able to review the email message with the report attached prior to it being sent out. Note: With this option, no blind copy (BCC) of the email is sent.

 

(8720, 8773)

 

 

Revenue Entry

 

Apply correct discount to UniGroup Rating downloads

Accessorials (storage items) that come in with a “long mile drayage” indicator (asrl_drayage_long_indt set to “Y”) are now discounted by the Transportation discount rather than the Storage discount. (8544)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R06

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R06)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R06)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R06)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R05

 

RELEASE DATE: 2/27/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

4

New Product Features

1

Release Enhancements

8

Release Fixes

2

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

1

Admin Changes

-

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Coming soon: Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, scheduled for release on May 22, 2017, the development environment of MoversSuite will no longer be compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Coming soon: Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

Anticipated for release in MoversSuite version 2017 R06 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R06 or later. (8638)

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

Assign “to be determined” dates on Local Service requests

 

The option to select a “to be determined” (TBD) date is now available to Local Services. The date range setting is now a Service Date selector that defaults to the date of “To be determined.”

 

Figure 127: Add Local Service screen

 

Pressing the new Service Date button produces a dialog providing you several date options to choose from.

 

Figure 128: Service selector within the Add Local Service screen

 

Available to you is the To be determined option. This setting is for a date not yet specified. Services assigned to this value cannot be sent to Local Dispatch. In fact, the Send to Dispatch option is disabled when the service date is set to TBD.

 

The Local Services grid displays “To be determined” for the service date column within the main data grid.

 

Figure 129: Local Services data grid

 

Selecting Single Date allows you to enter or choose a date for non-recurring service.

 

For recurring services, you can specify a Date Range and provide the beginning and ending dates along with specifying whether you wish to exclude the service from Saturday and/or Sunday. Note: Prior to this feature, the option was to Exclude Weekends; now you have the options to choose which day or days you wish to exclude.

 

Once Done is pressed within the Service Date selector, the application confirms the dates requested adjacent to the button.

Figure 130: Updated service date information within Add Local Service

 

The Service Date selector is available when you add a service from within Local Dispatch. However, the To be determined option is not available.

 

Refer to Add Local Service for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8416)

Added Service Date selector to Add Local Service.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Add Local Service

Local Services

Local Dispatch

Schema Changes Version 2017R05

 

 

 

 

Job costing and rating for planned services

 

Job Costing now includes planned services when it computes costing and rating for Labor and Equipment. During the Planning Phase of Job Costing, services that have not been dispatched (assignments made in Local Dispatch) now compute a Rated Amount and Cost amount for Labor and Equipment items. The application bases the calculation on what is set within the Equipment Request and Labor Request dialogs, which are available through the Add Local Service screen.

 

Figure 131: Add Local Service screen

 

Read more about this subject within the Job Costing Rating topic.

 

SUMMARY (8417)

Job Costing includes Labor and Equipment request during the Planned Phase.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Equipment Request

Job Costing

Job Costing Rating

Labor Request

 

 

 

 

 

Activity Type assignment to crew within Enter Actuals

 

When entering actuals for Local Services, there is now setting allowing you to associate an Activity Type to one or more crew person. The new setting within the Crew tab on the Enter Actuals screen is primarily for MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application usage.

 

Figure 132: Crew tab in Enter Actuals

 

The values available for the Activity Type are defined within Crew Activity Setup which is under the Operations category within MoversSuite Administration. Prior to this release, this setup was labeled Mobile Crew Time Activity Setup and listed under the MoversConnect category.

 

SUMMARY (8463, 8660)

Activity Type added to the Crew tab within Enter Actuals.

Added Crew Activity Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Crew

Crew Activity Setup

Enter Actuals

MoversConnect

 

 

 

 

Shipment Details available through Revenue Entry

 

Those of you working in can now access the Shipment Information screen directly from the Order Information tab by pressing Shipment Details.

 

Figure 133: Order Information (Revenue Entry) tab

 

Related to this is change is that if data exists behind the Trade Show Information button within the Shipment Information screen, then the text of the button is in bold font.

 

Figure 134: Shipment Details screen

 

 

SUMMARY (8570)

Added Shipment Details option to Revenue Entry.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Order Information (Office & Industrial)

Order Information (Revenue Entry)

Shipment Information

 

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

New and updated data views

 

Four new values have been added to the vOrderInformation Data View. They include the following:

Origin Country

Destination Country

Customer Number

Customer Name

 

The MoversSuite Data Views is now what is considered a dynamic view that integrates with the Microsoft Dynamics GP database. From this, a new view is available that can be utilized to retrieve the Customer Name when you supply the view the Customer Number. This new view is titled vCustomerInformation Data View.

 

SUMMARY (8424)

Fields added to vOrderInformation Data View.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

vCustomerInformation Data View

vOrderInformation Data View

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Connections

 

Atlas Revenue Download has the correct transportation amounts

A recent change that made the allocation amounts equal 100% caused the transportation amounts to calculate incorrectly. Now the gross transportation calculates correctly on an Atlas Revenue Import. (8718)

 

 

Document Management

 

Open multiple email windows from the Document Management Viewer

The Document Management Viewer allows you to open multiple mail windows at a time. Prior to this change, the application produced an error when opening multiple Outlook windows for multiple email messages. This change affects all document types (images, PDFs, etc.), not just email messages. (8648)

 

Attach/email documents without error

An error related to the availability flag added for MoversSuiteCrew Mobile Application (8606) is now fixed. (8714)

 

 

Job Costing

 

Services with “To be determined” dates excluded from Job Costing

The application now excludes services with Service Date of “To be determined” from Job Costing calculations. This fix is related to the recent addition of the TDB services added as a feature to this release. (8715)

 

 

Local Services

 

Equipment Type column locked from changes

The Equipment Type within Equipment Request is locked from allowing you to select the text within the column. Prior to this release, it appeared that you could change the text of the Equipment Type, however, the changes were not saved; the Equipment Type can only be changed through Equipment Type Setup. (8642)

 

Local Services for Office & Industrial require Origin Location

When adding a service through Add Local Service for an Office & Industrial order, the application requires that you set the Origin Location before you can save the service. (8662)

 

 

Payment Management

 

Customer number included on Atlas Statement Import

When processing an Atlas Settlement Statement Import, the application includes the customer number associated to the van line attached to the agent on the statement to all payments imported. Prior to this release, the missing customer number caused an incorrect payment balance when auto applying on the imported statements. (8673)

 

 

 

 

Revenue Entry

 

Manager can override user conflict on shared invoice

Users with manager access to Revenue Entry can now continue generating an invoice if they receive an error indicating that a draft of the invoice is being worked on by another user. When this error occurs, those with manager access will have the option to continue or cancel generating the invoice. Manger access is established by setting the Allow Manager Privileges flag on the Revenue Entry module for all appropriate branches within Security Profile Setup. (8360)

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R05

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R05)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R05)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R05)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R04

 

RELEASE DATE: 2/13/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

5

New Product Features

1

Release Enhancements

10

Release Fixes

14

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

6

Admin Changes

-

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, the MoversSuite development environment is compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Microsoft Windows Server 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R04, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Windows Server 2016.

 

Refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Sales team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

Coming soon: Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2008 R2 Compatibility

With version 2017 R11 of MoversSuite, scheduled for release on May 22, 2017, the development environment of MoversSuite will no longer be compatible with Microsoft SQL Server 2008 or SQL Server 2008 R2.

 

As of May 22, 2017, the lowest compatible database server hosting MoversSuite will be Microsoft SQL Server 2012. IMPORTANT: If you wish to upgrade to MoversSuite 2017 R11 or a later version of MoversSuite, your company must, at minimum, have Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher (see the Microsoft SQL Server 2016 Compatibility announcement).

 

Of note, being current on the latest versions of the hardware and software for our development environment allows us to provide better security, better support, and a better MoversSuite user experience. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Contact our EWS Support team to discuss migration options.

 

 

Coming soon: Windows Domain Authentication to log into MoversSuite

Anticipated for release in MoversSuite version 2017 R06 is the ability to open MoversSuite by using the credentials you enter when logging into your Windows environment. MoversSuite references the user identity associated to your Windows account to retrieve your MoversSuite login information. Then, when you launch MoversSuite, it opens without you having to enter your MoversSuite username and password.

 

IMPORTANT: If your company is not utilizing Windows Domain Authentication, then you will be unable to upgrade to version 2017 R06 or later. (8638)

 

 

SendAs Permission in Office 365

In order for MoversSuite users to send email through Office 365 (Microsoft Exchange Online) they must have SendAs permission on their mailbox. View the Office 365 Email Integration topic for information and instructions.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

Standalone Office & Industrial Module is Available

 

Now available within MoversSuite is the ability to capture and manage an Office & Industrial move request within its own standalone module.

 

Figure 135: Contents page

 

The Office & Industrial module provides a home Contacts and Locations tab that allows you to organize contacts along with the anticipated locations available to the move. You can also specify salesperson, coordinator, and project manager.

 

Figure 136: Contacts and Locations tab

 

By design, the Office & Industrial module pulls in key order information from the assigned Account Profile, which you can assign to the record when creating the order through the New menu. The information from the profile includes a list of contacts and locations that you can import into the order and utilize when establishing Local Services requests.

 

Figure 137: Import feature on Locations within Contacts and Locations

 

Open the Job Information tab to detail specifics of the project including client and operational notes, job starting and stopping date, materials requested, and more. You can document additional data through the Materials and Shipment Details functions and quickly lookup Order Personnel.

Figure 138: Job Information tab

 

Other tabs available to Office & Industrial moves include the following:

Account Profile

Billing Information

Local Services

Notes

Order Information (Office & Industrial)

Quote

SIT/Recurring Billing

Tasks

User Defined Fields

 

Requests for Local Services within the Office & Industrial module include specifics on the locations involved in the project, along with other needed service information.

Figure 139: Add/Edit Local Service dialog

 

Locations available for services include those specified within the Job Information tab. You define the two main locations through the Origin Location and Destination Location settings and link to any Additional Locations through the Select Locations screen.

 

Figure 140: Select Locations screen

 

Utilize Operational Plan features to dispatch the requests in an efficient manner.

 

Take advantage of Job Costing, Quote, Billing Information, and Enter Actuals functionality to record and bill revenue correctly and effectively.

 

In Revenue Entry, the Order Information (Office & Industrial) tab also displays the Locations and includes Contacts in its own tab. This tab also features the Job Start Date and Job End Date fields as well.

Figure 141: Order Information (Office & Industrial) tab

 

Order Details (Office & Industrial) is available when viewing an Office & Industrial order that displays data specific to an Office & Industrial move request. This screen features the Account Profile tab along with the Order Information.

 

Figure 142: Order Details (Office & Industrial)

 

 

Office & Industrial Specifications

 

Specific changes relating to the Office & Industrial module include the following:

 

Project Manager Role

New Labor Type of Project Manager is available. This role allows you to populate the Project Manager field on the Contacts and Locations tab. Manage the Labor Type through Labor Type Setup and set it for employees within the General tab in Personnel Setup.

 

Office & Industrial Security Module

New Security Profile module of Office & Industrial that grants access to Office & Industrial functionality based on branch. Access Type of Full allows users to create, update, and view Office & Industrial orders. Read Only access grants users the ability to view Office & Industrial orders only. The Office & Industrial module is branch specific and must be setup for each branch accordingly. Refer to Security Profile Setup.

 

Task Dependency Dates

Task Dependency Dates are available for the Job Start Date and Job End Date. These two fields are available through the Dependency Date and Dependency Task settings within Tasks Setup and within Add Task from the Tasks tab.

 

Letter Management Bookmarks

An addition bookmark group is available to Letter Management titled Office & Industrial that includes the Head Count, Job End Date, Job Start Date, and Project Manager that can be inserted into a Letter Management template.

 

Figure 143: Insert Bookmark dialog

 

 

Module-specific Editing

MoversSuite disables the New, Edit, Save, and Cancel buttons when you open an Office & Industrial order in a different module. In fact, the Edit, Save, and Cancel buttons are replaced with a caption that reads, “Edit through Office & Industrial only.”

 

Figure 144: Edit through... caption within Order Information

 

 

 

Conversely, if you open an Order Information module within Office & Industrial, then a similar message appears along with the disabling of the New, Edit, Save, and Cancel buttons. Note: You can now change the module affiliation of an order through the new Change Order Module option.

 

Locations display on Work Ticket

Locations set for an Office & Industrial service display within their own section on the Work Ticket Report. Data included on the listing is pulled from what is associated to the service through the Add Local Service screen.

 

 

Figure 145: Locations section from the Work Ticket Report

 

Refer to the Office & Industrial Moves video and Office & Industrial topic for more information on this product.

 

SUMMARY (8336, 8300, 8414, 8301, 8325, 8339, 8351, 8641, 8643, 8644, 8645, 8654, 8646, 8664)

New Office & Industrial module available.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Account Profile Setup

Add Local Service

Billing Information

Contents Menu

Contents Screen

Dispatch Center

Insert Bookmark

Local Service Type Setup

Local Service Quick View

Office & Industrial

Office & Industrial Bookmarks

Order Details (Office & Industrial)

Order History

Order Information (Office & Industrial)

Order-Level Functions

Order Personnel

Requested Services

Security Modules

Security Profile Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R04

Storage Information

Tasks

Tasks Setup

Work Ticket Report

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Change the module of an order

 

You can now switch the module of an order. The ability to switch and order to be associated to a different module is available with proper security access through the Tools Menu. Selecting the new option of Change Order Module opens the Change Order Module dialog allowing you to choose a module to associate to the order.

 

Figure 146: Change Order Module dialog

 

Options when choosing different module include Order Information, Special Services, International Orders, and Office & Industrial.

 

Figure 147: Change Order Module dialog selection options

 

A good example of usage for this feature is if you started entering information in the Order Information module and realized that the order falls under Office & Industrial, you can go Tools > Change Order Module and pick Office & Industrial. The application makes the association change and automatically saves the order to the new module.

 

The change is recorded within Order History.

 

A new security module of Change Order Module is available that can be assigned to personnel. The new module is not branch-specific, so a person only needs Full access to Change Order Module to access the feature for any order under any branch. Refer to Security Profile Setup for more information.

 

On a related change, the Open Order functions in MoversSuite now open the order in its associated module. For example, if you are working in Local Dispatch on an Office & Industrial order and press the Open Order button, the application opens the order within the Office & Industrial module. This change affects the following buttons:

 

Tasks > Open Order in Module

Local Dispatch > Open Order

Long Distance Dispatch > Open Order

 

 

SUMMARY (8363, 8655)

Updated functionality behind Open Order buttons.

Added Change Order Module to Security Profile Setup.

Added Change Order Module option to the Tools Menu.

Go To Module option removed from Tasks Setup and from the Workflow tab.

New Change Order Module dialog available.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Change Order Module

Local Dispatch

Long Distance Dispatch

Order History

Order History Fields

Security Profile Setup

Tasks

Tasks Setup

Tools Menu

Workflow

 

 

 

 

 

Default Branch on Equipment

 

You can now specify a default on your equipment resources available in Local Dispatch. A new Default Branch setting on the Branch tab within Equipment Setup allows your company to specify which branch you want associated to a resource by default.

 

Figure 148: Equipment Setup

 

You can identify the Default Branch for each resource through the assignment grid within the Dispatch Center.

 

Figure 149: Equipment assignment grid within the Dispatch Center

 

The Default Branch is referenced for informational usage only. Branches assigned to the resource through Equipment Setup are available for assignment to services associated to the same branch.

 

 SUMMARY (8384)

Default Branch added to Personnel Setup and to the equipment assignment grid in Local Dispatch.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Assign and Remove Equipment

Equipment Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R04

 

 

 

Quantity Based Rating for Job Costing

 

Your company now has the option to setup rating on dispatched equipment for inclusion into Job Costing.

 

Figure 150: Job Costing

 

MoversSuite computes the Rated Amount for Equipment in Job Costing based on the dispatched quantity or by the number of hours the item is in service.

 

Figure 151: Reserve Equipment

 

Note: The quantity rated in is not updated when actuals are entered. For example, if only 15 of 20 items returned, continues to rate only on the initial 20 items dispatched.

 

Refer to Job Costing and to Job Costing Rating for more information.

 

 SUMMARY (8586)

Job Costing now includes Rated Amount for dispatched equipment.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Job Costing Rating

 

 

 

 

 

Control which modules Local Services are available

 

You can now control which Local Services types are available to certain MoversSuite modules. A new Select one or more applicable modules section is available within Local Service Type Setup.

 

Figure 152: Local Service Type Setup

 

The service is available in each of the flagged modules. In the above example (Figure 18), the Commercial Move service is only available to Local Services within the Office & Industrial and Special Services modules.

 

Refer to Add Local Service and Local Service Type Setup for more information.

 

 SUMMARY (8349)

Select one or more applicable modules options added to Local Service Type Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Add Local Service

Local Service Type Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R04

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Creation of new users not allowed if maximum reached

 

Prior to this enhancement, MoversSuite allowed you to define users beyond the number of licenses available to your company. This caused an issue when anyone attempted to login in; in fact, users were prevented from logging in until the number of users established did not exceed the maximum.

 

Now, the application prevents you from adding users beyond the number of a licensed user allowed. When administrators attempt to add a user through the User tab in Personnel Setup and you are currently at your licensed amount, they receive the following error.

 

The number of permitted MoversSuite user licenses has been reached. No additional MoversSuite users can be added. Click the 'Remove MoversSuite User' button to remove MoversSuite access for this user so that you can save your other personnel changes.

 

View Licensing Setup to see a count of established users as well as the maximum number of licensed users allowed on your system.

 

SUMMARY (6895)

New error message and handling added to Personnel Setup that prevents user records being added if already at the maximum number of licensed users.

The following areas have been affected by this change:

Personnel Setup

 

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administration

 

Run installer as Administrator

The client installer for MoversSuite must be run as administrator, i.e. right-click on the installer application and choose Run as Administrator. With these elevated permissions, the application installs without a run-time error. (4389)

 

Updated text of database and application out-of-sync error

If a version of MoversSuite is not synchronized with the correct database version, then attempts to login to MoversSuite result in an error. The new error message reads, “The MoversSuite client needs to be updated to the current version. License verification error (Source = [SOURCE], Error = [ERROR].” Where the [SOURCE] is the error source (or specific product that is not synchronized) and [ERROR] is the numeric error code returned. In general, this error indicates that the database may have been updated during an upgrade but not the MoversSuite application. (8532)

 

Flag value displays for Rate Schedule for Labor

The state of the Regular time over 8 hours rated as OT flag is now displaying correctly within Rate Schedule for Labor. (8677)

 

 

Connections

 

Send to IGC for Survey option not visible by default

The Send to IGC for Survey option is no longer visible within the Third Party Applications Menu unless the module is enabled. (8509)

 

Fields added to the revenue allocations routine for TechMate Imports

The identifiers for the agent, branch, AR branch, and AR division are now included in the TechMate Import. (8717)

 

 

Customer Statements

 

Credit applied to other documents on the invoice lists once on the customer statement

If a credit is included on an invoice to a customer and then the credit is applied to some other document not included on the invoice, then this credit is not included on the customer statement. Prior to this change, the application counted this credit on the customer statement, causing the amount due from the customer to be off the amount of the credit. (7858)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

Reserved and Hours Reserved displaying correctly

The Reserved flag setting along with the number of Hours Reserved now display correctly within the equipment assignment grid within the Dispatch Center. (8661, 8659)

 

 

Local Services

 

Edit information stored for Local Services

If you make changes to the sub-dialog of a Local Services request, such as updating CPU counts and entering Labor Requests, etc. through the Add Local Service screen, MoversSuite records who and when these edits occurred and documents this through the Last Edited On and Last Edit By fields (available through the Local Services grid and within Local Dispatch). (8632)

 

 

Tasks

 

Copy Task working correctly

The Copy Task function evoked through the Tasks and Workflow tabs now works without an error. With changes made in version 2017 R04 for the Office & Industrial module, the Copy Task function was unable to locate the correct module to pull data from and produced a “DBGetToDoByID: Field ‘OpenOrderInModule’ not found” error. (8719)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R04

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R04)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R04)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R04)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R03

 

RELEASE DATE: 1/30/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

2

New Product Features

 

Release Enhancements

6

Release Fixes

6

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

3

Admin Changes

 

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

SendAs Permission in Office 365

In order for MoversSuite users to send email through Office 365 (Microsoft Exchange Online) they must have SendAs permission on their mailbox. View the Office 365 Email Integration topic for information and instructions.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

Overtime over eight hours for Rate Schedule for Labor

 

You now have the option to apply an overtime rate to personnel for regular time exceeding eight hours for any given day. A new flag is available that, when set, instructs the application to automatically apply an overtime rate to any time exceeding eight hours of regular time for all services a person works on a particular day.

 

The Regular time over 8 hours rated as OT flag is available for Rate Schedule for Labor records and is designed to provide a more accurate Job Costing assessment. When this flag is set and a person works over eight hours of Regular Rate for all services worked on a day, then costing automatically rates them at the Overtime Rate for the additional time.

 

Figure 153: Rate Schedule for Labor screen

 

The Rate Schedule for Labor in effect is based on the Branch or Account Profile affiliated to the order.

 

Refer to Job Costing Rating for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8604)

Added Regular time over 8 hours rated as OT setting to Rate Schedule for Labor records.

The following areas have been affected by this feature:

Job Costing Rating

Rate Schedule for Labor

Schema Changes Version 2017R03

 

 

 

Manage Operational Plan options added

 

The option to change the name of an Operational Plan is available to you through a right-click option within the Local Services data grid.

 

Figure 154: Right-click options within Local Services

 

Choosing the Manage Operational Plan option opens the Manage Operational Plan dialog allowing you to change the name of the plan and to provide any needed proposal notes (up to 1,024 characters).

 

Figure 155: Manage Operational Plan dialog

 

Making changes through the Manage Operational Plan dialog updates the plan information for all services assigned to the plan. For example, changing the Plan Name through this option updates the Plan Name on all services assigned to that particular plan.

 

Proposal Notes will eventually be available for quotes in an upcoming release of MoversSuite.

 

If you wish to update the plan for a single service or create a new plan, then use the Add or Edit Service options (see Add Local Service).

 

SUMMARY (8212, 8634)

Added Manage Operational Plan to the right-click options available within Local Services.

Added Manage Operational Plan dialog.

The following areas have been affected by this feature:

Local Services

Manage Operational Plan

Schema Changes Version 2017R03

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administration

 

Task Dependency Dates name change

The following name changes have been made that affect Task Dependency Dates:

 

SIT Orig To Perm Date is now SIT Orig Expiration

SIT Dest To Perm Date is now SIT Dest Expiration

 

These two dependency dates reference the SIT Expiration fields for the Origin and Destination sections, respectively, within the SIT/Recurring Billing tab and are referenced through the Dependency Date setting within Tasks Setup. (7579)

 

MoversSuite Development Docs database available

An empty Docs is now included in the MoversSuite installation package provided to our Developer Community. The instructions provided to users through our Developer Community have been updated to reference the Docs database. (8405)

 

Map interfaces to Rate Types

The ability to link a Rate Type to one or more external interfaces is available. The Rate Type mapping is primarily used for the UniGroup Rating Download. Refer to the Interface Item section within Labor Type Setup for more information. (8468)

 

 

Job Costing

 

Job Cost rating accounts for all scheduled labor

Rating amounts included in Job Costing now include all hours set for an order through the Rate Schedule for Labor. (8639, 8633)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

Auto-selected role when assigning crew

When assigning crew to a service and the person only has one Labor Type available, the application now auto selects this type for the role. Prior to this fix, you had to manually select the role when the person had only one Labor Type accessible to Local Dispatch that was not set as their default. (8217)

 

Figure 156: Assign Crew screen

 

 

Quotes

 

Enter negative amount with decimal

The application allows you to enter a negative amount containing a decimal (e.g. -7.25) for the Rate and other amounts for a Quote. Prior to this release, the application allowed only whole number negative amounts within these fields. (8472)

 

 

Revenue Entry

 

Transactions highlighted correctly

Only the last accessed or selected record within the Transactions grid highlights in blue. Prior to this release, adding or removing an item caused two records to show highlighted in the grid. (8310)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R03

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R03)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R03)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R03)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R02

 

RELEASE DATE: 1/16/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

2

New Product Features

-

Release Enhancements

12

Release Fixes

6

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

2

Admin Changes

-

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016 Compatibility

As of MoversSuite 2017 R02, MoversSuite is compatible with Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016. Please refer to our System Requirements for more information on the hardware and software compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Please contact our EWS Support team to discuss upgrade options.

 

 

SendAs Permission in Office 365

In order for MoversSuite users to send email through Office 365 (Microsoft Exchange Online) they must have SendAs permission on their mailbox. View the Office 365 Email Integration topic for information and instructions.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2016

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

Local service job times can cross midnight boundary

 

Service times for Local Services can cross over the midnight boundary. So, if your company has work done at night and goes into the morning of the next day, you can account for this time accordingly within MoversSuite.

 

The places in MoversSuite where the service time is set now allow you to enter an ending time that is beyond 12:00 AM. This includes the Add Local Service screen. When you enter a time past midnight, the application indicates this by tagging the entry with Ends Next Day in bold, red font.

 

Figure 157: Add Local Service screen

 

Data grids that display the service time now display the Next Day caption next to an ending time that crosses into the next day. This includes the Request Time Range within the Dispatch Center, Requested Services, and Local Services data grids.

 

Figure 158: Local Services data grid

 

In Local Dispatch, you have the option to set service times that also cross the midnight boundary. The Set Service Time screen allows for the times to cross over 12:00 AM and provides the Ends Next Day caption.

 

Figure 159: Set Service Time dialog

 

You can assign times to equipment resources that cross midnight as well.

 

Times set for crew and equipment that end in the following day display YES within the Next Day column. The Next Day column is available within the Assign Crew and Reserve Equipment screens.

 

Figure 160: Assign Crew screen

 

To assist you in viewing the times assigned to personnel, you can access a new Scheduled Times screen. This screen is available through an ellipses button  within the crew assignment grid, which is available when the person is assigned to one or more services on the Selected Date.

 

Figure 161: Crew Assignment grid

 

The Scheduled Times screen displays the service information for all services the person is assigned to for the Selected Date.

 

Figure 162: Scheduled Times screen

 

Another indicator that a service times crosses into the next day is that the Job End time field within the Dispatch Center and Local Services grids is highlighted in blue.

 

Figure 163: Dispatch Center tab

 

Watch the overview video for this release and reference the Add Local Service and Set Service Time topics for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8491, 8450, 8451)

Option to cross the midnight boundary has been added to the following:

Add Local Service

Assign Crew

Edit Crew

Edit Equipment

Enter Actuals

Reserve Equipment

Set Service Time

 

You can view Next Day or Ends Next Day captions in data grids within the following:

Dispatch Center

Local Services

Requested Services

 

Added the option to view Scheduled Times for a person for the Selected Date within the crew assignment grid.

The following areas have been affected by this feature:

Add Local Service

Assign Crew

Dispatch Center

Edit Crew

Edit Equipment

Enter Actuals

Local Services

Requested Services

Reserve Equipment

Scheduled Times

Set Service Time

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administration

 

Only one default Labor Type can be assigned to personnel

MoversSuite only allows one Labor Type to be marked as the Default within a Personnel Setup record. Prior to this change, the application was not disposing of memory captured by continuous views of different records. This fix allows the application to clear the memory buffer and allow the screen to respond more efficiently. (8573)

 

No change of description for system type Labor Types allowed

MoversSuite no longer allows you to update the description set for a Labor Type that is defined as a system type. A new Is System Type field exists as a read-only flag within Labor Type Setup that allows you to identify which records are a system type (checked) or not. When the Is System Type flag is set, you are not allowed to update the Labor Type setting. (6742)

 

Figure 164: Sample Labor Type Setup record

 

 

Collections

 

Refined working for the Customer Credit Warning options

The text of the options within the have been updated to clarify their meaning. (8267)

 

 

Commissions

 

Commission Statement no longer shows duplicate orders

MoversSuite now marks the First Name/MI as not set (null) anytime that this field is cleared/blanked out by a user. On prior releases, clearing this field caused the application to not match correctly when Commissions were generated, which resulted in duplicate order errors. (8577)

 

 

Connections

 

Survey End Time cannot come before Start Time

We modified the End Time field associated to the Survey Date set within the Agents tab to return an error if you attempt set an End Time that is before the Start Time.

 

Figure 165: Agents tab with error

 

Prior to this release, if the survey End Time was earlier than the Start Time, then a negative appointment duration was set for leads sent to QLAB, which caused errors within the QLAB system. (8592)

 

GP Data Warehouse Refresh works with multiple instances running concurrently

The Data Warehouse Refresh now runs automatically for customers hosted on the Azure Cloud. An issue with running this process on multiple instances has been corrected. (8582)

 

 

General

 

Username/password combination issue

An issue that prevented users from logging into the application based on a certain combination of username and password has been fixed. (8616)

 

 

Letter Management

 

Letter name displays in Document Management

A generated Letter Management document shows up in the Document Management system under the name of the document, such as Thank You Letter. Prior to this change, the document listed within the Document Management Viewer with the name associated to the Document Type, such as “Letter,” which was not enough information to readily identify the document or discern it from other such categorized files. (8435)

 

 

Local Services

 

Certain Local Services data not saving

When you edit a Local Services record and set certain fields not previously set, then the application is not saving these changes. For example, if the service times are not set when the service was added and you edit the service by setting the time, the application is not saving what you entered.

 

Additionally, changes made to sub-dialogs (CPU, Labor Request, etc.) within the Add Local Service screen are saved, however the Last Edited On and Last Edited By data within the Local Services grid does not reflect the updates. (8615)

 

 

Long Distance Dispatch

 

CPU data displays within Long Distance Dispatch

The Current Driver Activity and Orders tabs within Long Distance Dispatch now display the total count of Container, Packing, and Unpacking items set for the order through the Move Information tab. (8557)

 

Figure 166: Current Driver Activity data grid

 

 

MoversSuite Email Service

 

Email Service runs without error

The cannot communicate when one or more of the applications it communicates with is “Run As Administrator.” For example, if Microsoft Outlook or MoversSuite is ran as an administrator, then the cannot communicate and produces an “Operation unavailable” error. Avoid running MoversSuite or Microsoft Outlook as administrator.

 

A fix was made that allows the MoversSuite Email to process as part of a recurring processing, such as through Recurring Billing Management. A message of “An outgoing call cannot be made” was received when producing recurring email and the integration with Microsoft Outlook is enabled. You should no longer receive this error. (8545)

 

Default email signature now appears automatically

The default signature that you create through the Signatures dialog now automatically appears on any new email message, including emails generated for Letter Management documents. (8600)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R02

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R02)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R02)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R02)

 

 

 

Version 2017 R01

 

RELEASE DATE: 1/3/2017

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

0

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

3

Release Fixes

2

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

2

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

SendAs Permission in Office 365

In order for MoversSuite users to send email through Office 365 (Microsoft Exchange Online) they must have SendAs permission on their mailbox. View the Office 365 Email Integration topic for information and instructions.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Certain Local Services data not saving

When you edit a Local Services record and set certain fields not previously set, then the application is not saving these changes. For example, if the service times are not set when the service was added and you edit the service by setting the time, the application is not saving what you entered.

 

Additionally, changes made to sub-dialogs (CPU, Labor Request, etc.) within the Add Local Service screen are saved, however the Last Edited On and Last Edited By data within the Local Services grid does not reflect the updates. (8615)

 

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Base task due date on the completion of another task

 

Administrators can create tasks that have a due date that is computed based on the completion date of another task.

 

Within Tasks Setup, a new Dependency Date option of Completion of Other Task is available that, when selected, allows you to select a separate task within the new Dependency Task field. 

 

Figure 167: Add/Edit Task Item within Tasks Setup

 

In MoversSuite, when the Dependency Task is completed, then the completion date of that task is referenced to set the date of the dependent task.

 

Referencing the setup above (Figure 167), including the Due Days and Due Type settings, if the Check for driver’s paperwork task is completed on 12/9/2016, then the application computes a due date for the Bill Customer task as 3 days after, or 12/12/2016.

 

Figure 168: Task items within the Tasks tab

 

The task selected for the Dependency Task can also be dependent on the completion of another task; you can stagger all related tasks together in a similar fashion.

 

You can utilize the Completion of Other Task option and the related Dependency Task setting within the Add Task dialog when adding tasks through the Add Task dialog available within the Tasks tab and within the Workflow tab within the Tasks module.

 

Figure 169: Add Task dialog

 

The Dependency Task list includes all active and open tasks. Tasks marked as complete or not applicable are not available when choosing a Dependency Task.

 

MoversSuite does not update the due date once it is set. So, if a task containing a Dependency Task has the due date set and the dependency task is marked as completed or not applicable or if its due date changes, then the due date of the dependent task is not affected. Continuing with the example, if the Check for driver’s paperwork is marked as complete and the date manually updated to 12/20/2016, then the Bill Customer task remains as 12/12/2016 (see Figure 170 below). Note: An undo of a completed task does not affect the due date of dependent tasks.

 

 

Figure 170: Task items within the Tasks tab

 

 

If you attempt to edit a task that is dependent on another, then you may encounter that the Postpone feature is unavailable (see Figure 171). For dependency tasks, this results from the date not being set on the dependent task or that the dependent task is not complete or is marked as not applicable.

 

 

Figure 171: Edit Task dialog

 

Tip: Viewing Dependency Task

You can view the Dependency Date and/or Dependency Task set for a task item by choosing Copy Task. Additionally, you can view the Task List Report to see which tasks are marked with Completion of Other Task.

 

View the Tasks System topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8331)

Completion of Other Task option available through Dependency Date when adding or copying a task. This option triggers the availability of the Dependency Task setting.

Dependency Task setting added to Add Task and to Tasks Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Add Task

Edit Task

Tasks Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R01

 

 

 

Overlapping actual times for crew

 

A new option is available that allows you to assign overlapping service times to individuals through the Enter Actuals screen.

 

The new option is set for crew within the Dispatch tab of their Personnel Setup record.

 

Figure 172: Dispatch tab within Personnel Setup

 

Setting the Temp – Allow Overlapping Service Hours flag instructs MoversSuite to allow you to enter overlapping times for the person. This overlap can occur over one or multiple services on one or more orders. In the example below, the mover named Brandon Smith has two, time block entries: one from 6:00 AM to 3:00 PM and a second one from 2:00 PM to 6:00 PM. The overlap between 2:00 and 3:00 is allowed when this new flag is set. If Brandon is also scheduled on a different service for the same day, then potentially another overlap of time can occur across the multiple services.

 

Figure 173: Enter Actuals Screen

 

The application only allows overlapping times if all selected employees have the flag set. The Role column within Enter Actuals includes a (Temp) distinction within the Crew tab selector allowing you to identify which employees have the Temp - Allow Overlapping Service Hours flag set. You can add overlapping times for all “Temp” crew members.

 

Figure 174: Personnel selector within Enter Actuals

 

View the Add Task topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8540)

Temp – Allow Overlapping Service Hours setting added to the Dispatch tab within Personnel Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Crew

Enter Actuals

Personnel Setup

Schema Changes Version 2017R01

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administration

 

Restrictions on changing or deleting the Labor Type

If a Labor Type on a Personnel Setup record ties to generated commissions for the employee, MoversSuite no longer allows an administrator to remove this Labor Type (General tab) or the dependent commission set within the Accounting tab. For example, if a person is setup as an LD Driver and receives commission under this type, then it cannot be removed from the Personnel Setup record.

 

If you wish to not reference the Labor Type at all for the employee, then a new Personnel Setup record can be setup (using the Duplicate functionality) and the old record marked as inactive (Status flag on the General tab). (8547)

 

 

Connections

 

UniGroup AOM Registration update

The UniGroup AOM Registration import now translates the Shipment Type of G (for Government) to instruct the application to set the GBL Number to what is set for the imported UniGroup PO Number. Refer to UniGroup Registration Downloads for a listing of downloads from Unigroup. (8490)

 

 

Revenue Entry

 

Rates based on Rate Matrix do not affect quantity

If you update the quantity associated to a rate tied to a Rate Matrix within the Edit Advanced Rating Basis dialog, the application does not update the quantity that may be set for the revenue item.

 

For example, if you have a quantity of 7,500 set for the weight on a Revenue Item and wish to view the advanced setting to see what a rate computes for a 7,000 mile move, then the application updates only the rate and not the weight quantity set for the item.

 

Figure 175: Add Revenue Item with open Edit Advanced Rating Basis dialog

 

On prior releases, the quantity changes made within the dialog did update the quantity on an revenue, recurring billing, and invoice item. (8530)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2017R01

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2017R01)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2017R01)

MoversSuite Data Views (2017R01)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R26

 

RELEASE DATE: 12/19/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

0

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

5

Release Fixes

1

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

0

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

SendAs Permission in Office 365

In order for MoversSuite users to send email through Office 365 (Microsoft Exchange Online) they must have SendAs permission on their mailbox. View the Office 365 Email Integration topic for information and instructions.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Work Ticket and Difficulty Factor integrate better within Local Services

 

The Work Tickets and Difficulty Factor menu options are removed from the Local Dispatch tab.

 

Figure 176: Local Services tab

 

The Work Tickets button allowed you to see a list of work tickets associated to the order along with the ability to view the Work Ticket Report. The Work Ticket Number column is available within the Local Services data grid and therefore can be referenced to see the ticket associated to a paricular service.

 

We did add a new right-click option that allows you to view the Work Ticket Report for the selected service.

 

Figure 177: Right-click options within Local Services

 

The Difficulty Factors button displayed any factors set for a selected service. You can now view this information through the Local Service Quick View.

 

Figure 178: Difficulty Factors section within the Local Service Quick View

 

 

SUMMARY (8388, 8389)

Work Tickets and Difficulty Factors buttons removed from the Local Services tab.

Work Ticket option added to the right-click options within the Local Services data grid allowing you to view the Work Ticket Report. The Work Ticket No. column can be referenced to identify any work ticket associated to the order.

Difficult Factors section added to the Local Service Quick View.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Local Service Quick View

Local Services

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administration

 

All Rate Schedule for Labor tiers recognized

The application now interprets all Rate Schedule for Labor when calculating the Rated Amounts associated to the Labor expense within Job Costing. This was a Known Issue for MoversSuite 2016 R25. (8588)

 

Default Labor Type setting is saved on personnel records

When checking the Default flag for a Labor Type on the General tab within Personnel Setup and you navigate to another tab, the changes you made to the Labor Type assignments are now saved. Prior to this release, if you changed the Default flag for a new Labor Type assignment and went to a different tab in the setup, the change Default state was not being saved. (8566)

 

Setup name change for Rate Schedule for Labor

The name of the setup to support labor rating within Job Costing is now titled Rate Schedule for Labor. On the prior release, this setup area was titled Labor Rating Schedule. (8454)

 

Label change within Rate Schedule for Labor

The “Over Time Rate” type has been changed to read as “Overtime Rate” within the Rate Schedule for Labor. This setup is part of Job Costing. (8455)

 

 

Order Information

 

Modified branch access to quotes

Users must have Full security access to the Quote module for a branch in in order add or edit quote for that particular branch. Refer to the Security Modules topic for more information. (8528)

 

Agent contacts available as email recipients

There is now the ability to add agent contacts quickly to a MoversSuite Email message. The Add Email Address dialog displays the email address for contacts listed for the agents assigned to the order through the Agents tab. The list of agent emails pulls from the contacts information established within the Agent Setup. (8569)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R26

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R26)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R26)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R26)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R25

 

RELEASE DATE: 12/5/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

2

New Product Features

1

Release Enhancements

1

Release Fixes

16

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

11

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please refer to the following information regarding the hardware and software required to support MoversSuite and related systems.

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

SendAs Permission in Office 365

In order for MoversSuite users to send email through Office 365 (Microsoft Exchange Online) they must have SendAs permission on their mailbox. View the Office 365 Email Integration topic for information and instructions.

 

 

Dynamics GP Requirements

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issues are not resolved for this release.

 

Rate Schedule for Labor recognizes only one tier per day

If your company utilizes Job Costing Rating, then an issue with the 2016 R25 release is causing the application to only compute the Rated Amount of Labor based on the first tier listed for the day of the week within Rate Schedule for Labor. (8588)

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

Attach Documents to Equipment Records

 

Your company can take advantage of a new feature that allows you to link documents to an equipment resource. Such documents may include registration information and inspection reports. These documents are visible to through Local Dispatch through the Equipment Information screen (right-click within the equipment assignment grid and choose View Equipment Information).

 

Figure 179: Documents tab within the Equipment Information screen

 

From this new tab within the Equipment Information screen, you can view the contents of a document and add a document to a resource as well.

 

Additional features include document security that entails allowing only certain individuals access to secured documents. Refer to the Equipment Documents and Equipment Documents Setup topics for setup and usage information.

 

SUMMARY (8382)

Replaced View Safety Information with View Equipment Information which now opens the Equipment Information screen.

New Documents tab available through Equipment Information and through Equipment Setup display documents linked to a resource.

New administrative setup and security roles (Admin Profile Setup) for Equipment Document Group Setup, Equipment Document Type Setup, and Equipment Document Type Security Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Admin Profile Setup

Equipment Document Group Setup

Equipment Document Type Setup

Equipment Document Type Security Setup

Equipment Type Setup

Right-Click Options (Local Dispatch)

Safety Information (Equipment)

Schema Changes Version 2016R25

 

 

 

 

Attach Documents to Account Profiles

 

You can link documents to Account Profiles which are visible through the Account Profile tab.

 

Figure 180: Account Profiles tab

 

The new Documents section lists all documents linked to the profile.

 

Figure 181: Document section within Account Profile tab

 

You can view the contents of a document through the right-click option of View Document.

 

Figure 182: Right-click option within the Documents section

 

Administrative features allow your company to define document types and groups. Refer to the Account Profile Documents and Account Profile Documents Setup topics for setup and usage information.

 

SUMMARY (8381)

You can now view documents through a new Documents section within the Account Profile tab.

New administrative setup and security roles (Admin Profile Setup) for Account Profile Document Group Setup, and Account Profile Document Type Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Account Profile

Account Profile Documents

Account Profile Documents Setup

Account Profile Document Group Setup

Account Profile Document Type Setup

Account Profile Setup

Admin Profile Setup

Schema Changes Version 2016R25

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Anticipated rated expense added to Job Costing

 

Job Costing now features the ability to view the rated amount of expense items. This allows you to gain a more realistic picture of the revenue associated to the move as it relates to the expense items involved.

 

The new Rated Amount column displays the amount computed for items associated to one of the expense categories, e.g. Material. The actual rate used in the calculation is pulled from the Rate Plan set for the order.

 

 

Figure 183: Job Costing screen

 

Rating calculates on Equipment, Labor, and Material items on the service. Additionally, you can define a Rate Schedule for Labor to determine whether to apply regular, double, or overtime rates when computing Labor. The schedule in effect is based on the Account Profile assigned to the order or Branch of the order, or if not set in either place, the default Rate Schedule for Labor record is referenced to determine the rate type for labor.

 

Administrators can assign a Rate Schedule for Labor to profiles through Account Profile Setup and/or for a braches within Branch Setup.

 

Figure 184: Rate Schedule for Labor within Account Profile Setup

 

Read more about utilizing the rating feature within Job Costing Rating.

 

SUMMARY (8371, 8372, 8449, 8549)

Rated Amount column added to the Single Order tab within Job Costing.

Rate Schedule for Labor setting added to Account Profile Setup and to Branch Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Account Profile Setup

Branch Setup

Job Costing

Job Costing Rating

Rate Schedule for Labor

Single Order

Schema Changes Version 2016R25

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administration

 

Order Archiving without permissions error

You no longer receive a permissions error when performing an Order Archive. (7563)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R25

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R25)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R25)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R25)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R24

 

RELEASE DATE: 11/21/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

1

New Product Features

0

Release Enhancements

4

Release Fixes

8

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

0

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE FEATURES

 

Attach Documents to Personnel Records

 

Your company can take advantage of a new feature that allows you to link documents to an employee. Such documents may include a copy of a driver’s license, driver logs, and performance reviews. These documents are visible to through both dispatching modules through the Personnel Information screen.

 

Figure 185: Personnel Information screen

 

From this new tab within the Personnel Information screen, you can view the contents of a document and add a document to a resource.

 

Additional features include document security that entails allowing only certain individuals access to secured documents. Refer to the Personnel Documents and Personnel Documents Setup topics for setup and usage information.

 

Look for the ability to attach documents to equipment and to Account Profiles in upcoming releases of MoversSuite.

 

SUMMARY (8380)

Replaced View Safety Information with View Personnel Information which now opens the Personnel Information screen.

New Security Modules option titled Personnel Document Management is available.

New Documents tab available through Personnel Information and through Personnel Setup display documents linked to a person.

New administrative setup and security roles for Personnel Document Group Setup, Personnel Document Type Setup, and Personnel Document Type Security Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Admin Profile Setup

Personnel Documents

Personnel Documents Setup

Personnel Document Group Setup

Personnel Document Type Setup

Personnel Document Type Security Setup

Right-Click Options (Local Dispatch)

Right-Click Options (Long Distance Dispatch)

Safety Information (Personnel)

Schema Changes Version 2016R24

Security Modules

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Connections

 

Atlas linehaul revenue importing correctly

Items marked for a basis of Linehaul but have a percentage of 0 are now treated as standalone items. Prior to this release, these items were bringing in the entire amount of transportation. (8453)

 

 

Order Information

 

Closing Ratio Report showing all leads

The Closing Ratios Report now displays all leads regardless of whether they link to a foreign or direct order. Prior to this report, MoversSuite excluded orders marked as a foreign order. (8423)

 

Replacement font based on first character of placeholder text

When replacing the placeholder text of Letter Management Bookmarks, the application references the font applied to the first character of the text to determine the font of the data inserted into the document. For example, if you have an Arial font style on the ‘S’ of a bookmark you named, “Shipper,” then the entire text of the replaced text (“John Smith”) is in Arial font. Prior to this release, the application referenced the last character. (8513)

 

O&I Master Invoice Report now shows all detail information

The OI Master Invoice Report now displays sub-orders and invoice details within the body of the report. (8510)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R24

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R24)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R24)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R24)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R23

 

RELEASE DATE: 11/7/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

1

Release Enhancements

0

Release Fixes

4

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

0

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Letter Management Email Integration

 

You now have an option to generate a Letter Management template directly into the body of a MoversSuite Email.

 

If your company utilizes the Letter Management system, you now see an additional option through the Reports Menu. If you hover your mouse over a Letter Management template document, you receive the option to open the letter as a document or as an email. 

 

Figure 186: Reports Menu

 

Choosing As Document opens the letter through the Letter Management system.

 

Figure 187: Sample Letter Management document

 

 

Choosing As Email opens the letter within a new MoversSuite Email window.

 

Figure 188: Sample Letter Management email

 

The ability to render a Letter Management template as a document or email is available through the Reports/Letters menus within the Quote tab and within Claims.

 

Figure 189: Reports/Letters menu on the Quote tab

 

 

This change is part of our ongoing effort to create useful tools through our Productivity Pack.

 

SUMMARY (8162)

As Documents and As Email options added to the Reports Menu and to the Reports/Letters menus within the Claims module and on the Quote tab.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Letter Management

MoversSuite Email

Reports Menu

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

NO RELEASE FIXES

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R23

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R23)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R23)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R23)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R22

 

RELEASE DATE: 10/24/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

0

Release Fixes

22

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

2

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Updated Enter Actuals Screen

 

The screen that captures actual times and quantities associated to a Local Services request has been updated. The new Enter Actuals screen provides a streamline approach to entering times for crew and equipment along with tallying the quantities used.

 

Figure 190: Enter Actuals screen

 

The Enter Actuals screen replaces the Release Work Ticket screen that many of you may be acquainted with. Instead of having multiple dialogs to update the crew, equipment, CPU counts, etc. we placed this functionality with a single form for entering and displaying actuals. The screen divides functionality into tabbed categories.

 

The following table describes the changes made that affect entering counts and hours for Local Services requests.

 

 

Key Changes

Release Work Ticket screen replaced by Enter Actuals screen. This new screen integrates data functionality within the screen itself instead forcing user to open dialogs.

Crew tab in the new Enter Actuals screen replaces crew listing and Update Crew screen. The Crew tab allows you to select one or more employee and add times quickly using the Add button. Additionally, remove crew times through a right-click option.

Actual times for crew can be entered up to one day after the date of service.

Overlapping crew times are not allowed. The system verifies that the date and times entered do not conflict for the employee on the open service as well as all other service the person is assigned.

Equipment Times in the Enter Actuals screen replaces the Update Equipment functionality. Similar changes were made to the Equipment Times tab as were made to the Crew tab.

The Equipment Quantities tab is new functionality that allows you to set counts for equipment resources set up to dispatch by quantity.

Containers, Packing and Unpacking, Crates, and Other Services tabs within the Enter Actuals screen replace existing functionality that was evoked through dialogs within the Release Work Ticket.

 

The Enter Actuals topic contains more information on this functionality including an overview of suggested usage.

 

This change is part of our ongoing effort to support Office & Industrial moves.

 

SUMMARY (8244, 8446, 8445, 8474, 8469)

New Enter Actuals screen replacing the Release Work Ticket screen.

Actual times for crew can be entered for a date that is after the service date (8445, 8474).

Overlapping crew times not allowed (8446).

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Enter Actuals

Schema Changes Version 2016R22

 

 

 

 

Support for regular, overtime, and double rates

 

You can now set regular, overtime, and double rates for crew when creating revenue, quote, and invoice items. A new Rate As option appears when the Apply Regular, OT and Double Rates flag is set for the Rate Type. The application pulls default rates assigned to the Rate Plan on the order based on the Item Code.

 

Figure 191: Add Revenue Group screen

 

Set the Apply Regular, OT and Double Rates flag within Rate Type Setup to turn on the rating feature.

 

Figure 192: Rate Type Setup

 

Prior to this release, only the application only utilized the Rate field, which is considered the regular rate. Now, you can specify an overtime and double rate to apply to your rate type calculations. Set all three values through the Rate items associated to a Rate Plan Setup record.

 

Figure 193: Rate item screen within Rate Plan Setup

 

Many companies created additional rate records to establish overtime rates. Now, you can specify the overtime rate along with the regular rate on the plan. Then instruct the application to reference the overtime rate through the Rate As feature.

 

You can utilize the Rate As feature when creating revenue groups and items, when manually adding items to an invoice, on quotes, and on storage billing through the following:

Add Billing Item

Add Revenue Group

Add Revenue Item

New Complete Invoice

Quote

 

This change is part of our ongoing effort to support Office & Industrial moves and we foresee using this functionality more when we implement changes that affect Job Costing.

 

SUMMARY (8256)

Rate As option added to Add Billing Item, Add Revenue Group, Add Revenue Item, New Complete Invoice, and the Quote tab.

Apply Regular, OT and Double Rates flag added to Rate Type Setup.

OT Rate and Double Rate added to the Rate items definition within Rate Plan Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Add Billing Item

Add Invoice Line Item

Add Revenue Group

Add Revenue Item

Advanced Rating

Quote

Rating Systems

Schema Changes Version 2016R22

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

NO RELEASE FIXES

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R22

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R22)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R22)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R22)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R21

 

RELEASE DATE: 10/10/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

1

Release Enhancements

5

Release Fixes

5

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

2

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Define Labor Rating Schedule for Revenue Import

 

Under the Accounting & Financial Services category in MoversSuite Administration, we added two new setup areas designed to determine the rating type applied for local service requests for particular days of the week. The functionality related to this new setup is scheduled for implementation in a later release.

 

Under the Holiday Setup, you can set which days you wish to recognize as holiday pay for local service requests.

 

Figure 194: Holiday Setup

 

Within the Rate Schedule for Labor, your company can apply a pay rating type to particular days of the week and for a given time or times within each day.

 

Figure 195: Labor Rating Schedule

 

This enhancement is part of our ongoing development of support for Office & Industrial Moves.

 

More information on using these two additional setup areas will be available in upcoming releases of MoversSuite.

 

SUMMARY (8259)

Added to the Holiday Setup and Rate Schedule for Labor

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Holiday Setup

Rate Schedule for Labor

Schema Changes Version 2016R20

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administration

 

No error when duplicating Equipment Type records

You can add duplicate Equipment Type Setup records without receiving an error. (8309)

 

Username appears in application title bar

The name of the user logged into MoversSuite Administration appears in the window’s title bar. Prior to this release, the name of the user only appeared if the Custom Title was set (System Wide Options). (8398)

 

 

Local Dispatch

 

Filtering enabled when Filter by Role in effect

The filtering on the crew assignment grid within the Dispatch Center now allows filtering even when the Filter by Role option is turned on. Prior to this release, if the Filter by Role option was on, the grid did not allow you to filter by any column, such as selecting a particular Last Name. (8418)

 

 

Order Information

 

Create menu for quotes displays options correctly

The Create menu now displays options in the correct, alphanumeric order. (8412)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R21

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R21)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R21)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R21)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R20

 

RELEASE DATE: 9/26/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

6

Release Enhancements

3

Release Fixes

2

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

1

Admin Changes

1

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Dispatch Equipment by Quantity

 

You can dispatch a service by quantity as well as by service time.

 

Your company can define which Equipment Type Setup records are to be dispatched by quantity by setting the Dispatch based on quantity flag.

 

Figure 196: Equipment Type Setup

 

When assignments are made within Local Dispatch for resources to dispatch based on quantity, then dispatchers can confirm and modify the Quantity from within the Reserve Equipment screen.

 

Figure 197: Reserve Equipment

 

The default Quantity value is based on the Requested Quantity set through the Equipment Request dialog (through Add Local Service).

 

Figure 198: Equipment Request

 

When auto dispatching one or more services, the application automatically updates the quantity assignment based on what is set through the Equipment Request.

 

Services based on times continue to be dispatched by service times.

 

Within the Local Service Quick View, quantity values set within Equipment Request list under the Equipment Requirements section and list under the Assigned Quantity-based Equipment section when the service is assigned to a resource.

 

Figure 199: Local Service Quick View

 

A separate Assigned Hourly Equipment listing is now available for services dispatched by service time. See Local Service Quick View for more information.

 

Quantity values also appear on the Work Ticket Report under an Equipment listing. Each quantity-based assignment displays in its own Equipment section.

 

Figure 200: Work Ticket Report

 

This enhancement is part of our ongoing development of support for Office & Industrial Moves.

 

SUMMARY (8240)

Dispatch based on quantity flag added to the Equipment Type Setup.

Quantity added to Reserve Equipment for resources assigned to an Equipment Type with the Dispatch based on quantity flag set.

Assigned Quantity-based Equipment and Assigned Hourly Equipment sections added to the Local Service Quick View.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Equipment Type Setup

Local Service Quick View

Reserve Equipment

Schema Changes Version 2016R20

Work Ticket Report

 

 

 

Select Quote Item Code based on Rate Plan

 

When you select an Item Code for a quoted line item within the Quote tab, the application automatically filters the list of available Item Codes based on the Rate Plan assigned to the order (Rate Plan is assigned through the Billing Information tab). For example, if the Rate Plan on the order only includes Item Codes 100 through 300, then only these appear as options within the drop-down selector.

 

Figure 201: Item Code selector within the Quote tab

 

Also available is the ability to search through all mapped Item Codes (mapping is based on Type of Move, Authority, etc.). Pressing the lookup icon next to the Item Code selector opens the new Item Code Search dialog.

 

 

Figure 202: Item Code Search dialog

 

The Item Code Search dialog allows you to select from all mapped Item Codes by default. You can refine the list to view codes that exist under a particular Revenue Group and/or those that contain a particular word or phrase within the Filter By section.

 

Figure 203: Filter By section within Item Code Search

 

If there is no Rate Plan assigned to the order, then all appropriate rates are available, i.e. there is no filtering in effect.

 

This enhancement is part of our ongoing development of support for Office & Industrial Moves.

 

SUMMARY (8197)

Item Code Search added to the Quote tab.

Auto filtering of Item Code when selecting an Item Code within the Quote Details section on the Quote tab.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Item Code Search

 

 

 

 

Branch column added to Requested Services

 

The Branch of the service is now available through the Requested Services tab within the Requested Services screen.

 

Figure 204: Requested Services screen

 

Many of you find this useful to assist you in identifying the exact branch owning the service under the Dispatching Common View.

 

SUMMARY (8383)

Branch added to the Requested Services.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Requested Services

 

 

 

 

 

Update Properties on Letter Management Templates

 

An Edit Properties option is now available to you through the Manage Letters screen.

 

Figure 205: Manage Letters screen

 

This option allows you to access the dialog to update the Name, System Location, Report Group, and Document Type of a Letter Management template.

 

Figure 206: Letter Template Properties dialog

 

Prior to this release, to update the properties you had to update the template through the Report Setup.

 

The name of the Edit button within Manage Letters was changed to Edit Document to clarify its meaning.

 

SUMMARY (8370)

Edit Properties added to the Manage Letters screen.

Edit button label changed to Edit Document within the Manage Letters screen.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Letter Template Properties

Manage Letters

 

 

 

 

Military/Government SSN Bookmark Added to Letter Management

 

The SSN bookmark is now available under the list of available Military Bookmarks for Letter Management templates.

 

Figure 207: Insert Bookmark screen

 

Utilize the Insert Bookmark functionality within the Letter Designer to locate and add the SSN bookmark to your templates.

 

The bookmark displays the Social Security Number entered through the Military/Government tab in concealed format of “XXX-XX-9999” allowing only the last four-digits to display.

 

SUMMARY (8358)

SSN added to the Military Bookmarks tab.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Insert Bookmark

Military Bookmarks

 

 

 

Updated Quote Bookmarks for Letter Management

 

The Quote Bookmarks for Letter Management templates have been updated. We removed vendor and service provider information from the Quote Information bookmark. We also separated out the total amount of the quote into its own Quote Amount bookmark.

 

A Quote Number bookmark is also available.

 

All three bookmarks list under the Quotes group within the Insert Bookmark dialog available through the Letter Designer.

 

Figure 208: Insert Bookmark screen

 

Refer to the Quote Bookmarks topic for more information on these bookmarks.

 

SUMMARY (8103)

Quote Amount and Quote Number added to the Quote Bookmarks.

Quote Information modified to include only the Description, Charge, Rate, Quantity fields, Rate Type, and Item Code.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Insert Bookmark

Quote Bookmarks

 

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Connections

 

Third party errors show current order no matter which module you have open

If you are viewing an order that has a connection error with a third party, you can now access this same order through the Third Party Application Error Management screen no matter which module you have open. Prior to this release, some orders were not visible through the Third Party Application Error Management screen when viewed through the Revenue Entry module. (7452)

 

Local Dispatch

 

Clear service times

You now have the ability to clear out the service times within Set Service Time.

 

Clear either the Job Start Time or Job End Time field by highlighting the entire time value within the field and pressing the Delete key on your keyboard. This resets the time to 12:00 AM. Once you click to another field, such as the Job End Time, the time field is cleared or blanked out.

 

Figure 209: Set Service Time dialog

 

Additionally, you can clear a date and press Save and the date is cleared for the service.

 

(8352)

 

 

Order Information

 

Faster load times for MoversSuite Email

The MoversSuite Email Service is now faster when opening the new mail message window. You will encounter initial slowness upon the first time you open a message during a MoversSuite session. However, each subsequent opening should be much faster. 

 

Please note that performance is affected by the number of mail windows that are open. To increase performance, minimize the number of MoversSuite Email Service windows you have open. (8395, 8396, 8428, 8437)

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R20

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R20)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R20)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R20)

 

 

 

 

Version 2016 R19

 

RELEASE DATE: 9/12/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

3

Release Enhancements

3

Release Fixes

9

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

5

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Default Address based on Account Profile

 

You have the ability to populate addresses and consignor/consignee or contact information based on the Account Profile assigned to the order. The Autofill Preset Address button is available wherever you assign key addresses, which includes the Name, Address, Phone tab.

 

Figure 210: Autofill Preset Address dialog evoked from Name, Address, Phone tab

 

Choosing the Autofill Preset Address button opens an Autofill Preset Address dialog allowing you to choose an address associated to the Account Profile on the order. Once a selection is made, the application updates the associated address, e.g. Moving From address, with details set within the Account Profile, including updating the address, city, state, and postal code and updating the consignor/consignee of the order (Name, Address, Phone tab) or the contact information associated to an Extra Stops record (Add Extra Stop).

 

The Autofill Preset Address option is available through the following locations:

    Moving From, Moving To – Primary, and Moving To – Secondary addresses within the Name, Address, Phone tab. Consignor/Consignee data is updated as well the address.

    Add Extra Stop available through the Extra Stops tab from within Order Information and Order Information (Revenue Entry). Contact Information is updated as well the address.

    Add Extra Stop available when assigning a stop to a Local Services (see Add Local Service) or Container Management record (see Assign Location and Assign Order). Contact Information is updated as well the address.

 

The preset addresses available are linked to the profile through the new Preset Addresses tab within Account Profile Setup.

 

Figure 211: Account Profile Setup

 

Enter preset addresses for the profile through the new Add Account Profile Preset screen.

 

Figure 212: Add Account Profile Preset screen

 

This enhancement is part of our ongoing development of support for Office & Industrial Moves.

 

SUMMARY (7732, 8403)

Added Autofill Preset Address to the ability to Add Extra Stop screen and to the Name, Address, Phone tab

Added ability to define preset addresses for a profile through the Preset Addresses tab within Account Profile Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Account Profile Setup

Add Account Profile Preset

Add Extra Stop

Add Local Service

Autofill Preset Address

Name, Address, Phone

Schema Changes Version 2016R19

 

 

 

 

Create and Apply Quote Templates

 

With this release, we introduce the ability to manage quote templates. You can create templates containing all the quote details you desire through MoversSuite Administration or directly from within the Quote tab. Two new options available to you include creating a quote from a template already stored on your system and the ability to create a template from the quote currently being viewed.

 

Figure 213: Quote tab

 

The Quote from Template option allows you to create a new quote based on an existing template.

 

Figure 214: Create menu

 

This list includes templates created through the Template from Current option or through the Quote Template Setup.

 

Figure 215: Quote Template Setup

 

Administrators can quickly create a quote template and add details or duplicate the details of an existing template. The options available when creating the detail items include selecting an Item Code, entering the Description, assigning a Rate Type to the item, and arranging the order in which the item appears in the list of Quote Details.

 

Figure 216: Add Quote Template Detail dialog

 

When a quote is created based on a template, all the details populate automatically.

 

No groups are saved to the template, therefore if groups are needed, they must be manually entered after the template populates.

 

To save an existing quote to a template, select the Template from Current option and provide a Template Name (up to 64 characters in length).

 

Figure 217: Create Template from Current Quote dialog

 

This enhancement is part of our ongoing development of support for Office & Industrial Moves.

 

SUMMARY (8193, 8406, 8407, 8408, 8413)

Quote from Template and Template from Current options added to the Create function within the Quote tab.

Quote Template Setup added.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Add Quote Template Detail

Quote

Quote Template Setup

Schema Changes Version 2016R19

 

 

 

Safety Fields Added to Personnel and Equipment

 

We added several data fields that you can track through the Safety System.

 

On the Safety Information (Personnel) screen, you can now view the License Number and License Class data. Additionally, we renamed the License Expires Date to License Expires.

 

Figure 218: Safety Information (Personnel) screen

 

Administrators can set and manage this data through the updated Safety tab within Personnel Setup.

 

Figure 219: Safety tab within Personnel Setup

 

Several fields were added to the Safety Information (Equipment) screen as well. You now see the License Plate Number, DOT Inspection Expires and DOT Inspection Dates. And, License Plate Expiration Date is renamed from License Due Date.

 

Figure 220: Safety Information (Equipment) screen

 

 

The DOT Inspection Expires date is a safety trigger date. This means that the safety indicator within the Safety System updates based on what is entered for this date.

 

Administrators can set and manage this data through the updated Safety tab within Equipment Setup.

 

Figure 221: Safety tab within Equipment Setup

 

Two additional fields were added to Equipment Setup. You can now set the Registered Owner along with the Purchase Price on equipment records. This information will come into play with future development within Job Costing.

 

Figure 222: Other tab within Equipment Setup

 

 

SUMMARY (8343)

License Number and License Class added to the Safety tab within Personnel Setup and within Safety Information (Personnel).

Renamed License Expires Date to License Expires within the Safety tab within Personnel Setup and within the Safety Information (Personnel) screen.

DOT Inspection Date, DOT Expires Date, and License Plate Number added to the Safety tab within Equipment Setup and within Safety Information (Equipment).

Renamed License Due Date to License Plate Expiration Date within the Safety tab within Equipment Setup and within Safety Information (Equipment).

Added Registered Owner and Purchase Price to the Other tab within Equipment Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Equipment Setup

Personnel Setup

Safety Information (Equipment)

Safety Information (Personnel)

Schema Changes Version 2016R19

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Connections

 

Consistent System.Net.HTTP.Formatting across all projects

When installing MoversSuite products, we now check that the System.Net.HTTP.Formatting version is consistent for all projects including the MoversSuite API Service and MoversSuite Administration. (8395)

 

Long Distance Dispatch

 

Grouped data no longer causing error

You can now group data within the Current Driver Activity tab when the Show All option is on. Prior to this release, anytime you grouped the data and the Show All option was checked, the application returned an error. (8401)

 

Order Information

 

Quote tab grid alignment

The grid for Quote Details within the Quote tab now aligns the detail lines for a group along with the header row. Prior to this release and in Edit mode, the group details did not align with the column (and group) headers. (8410)

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R19

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R19)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R19)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R19)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R18

 

RELEASE DATE: 8/29/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

6

Release Enhancements

2

Release Fixes

5

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

1

Admin Changes

2

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Associate Extra Stops to a Local Service Request

 

You now have the ability to link a service to one or more Extra Stops on the order. This allows you to refine what is truly required for a particular service request. Further, we updated the Work Ticket Report to display only those Extra Stops associated to the service; prior to this release all Extra Stops set for the order displayed on all work tickets.

 

The Add Local Service screen now features an Extra Stops button.

 

Figure 223: Add Local Services screen

 

Pressing Extra Stops opens a new Select Extra Stops dialog. Displayed in this dialog are all the extra stops associated to the order, i.e. all those listed on the Extra Stops tab. To link a stop to the service, place a checkmark in the first column  associated to the stop.

 

Figure 224: Select Extra Stops screen

 

Only selected stops link to the service and display on the Work Ticket Report. Note: Extra Stops do not appear on the Work Ticket Report unless they are linked to the service through the Select Extra Stops screen.

 

Figure 225: Extra Stops section of the Work Ticket Report

 

Refer to the Add Extra Stop topic for more information.

 

The Local Service Quick View displays Extra Stops associated to the selected service.

 

This enhancement is part of our ongoing development of support for Office & Industrial Moves.

 

SUMMARY (8242, 8377)

Added the ability to associate one or more Extra Stops to a local service request.

Extra Stops button added to Add Extra Stop, which opens the new Select Extra Stops dialog.

Work Ticket Report updated to list only Extra Stops associated to the service through Add Extra Stop.

Local Service Quick View displays Extra Stops linked to the particular service.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Add Extra Stop

Local Service Quick View

Schema Changes Version 2016R18

Select Extra Stops

Work Ticket Report

 

 

 

 

Define Start Day of the Work Week

 

Your company can define the starting day of the work week for local service crew assignments. Previously, MoversSuite assumed a work week that began on Sunday and ended on Saturday. With this enhancement, you can set the First Day of the Week within System Wide Options, which affects the total weekly hours calculated for crew within Local Dispatch.

 

Figure 226: System Wide Options

 

By default, the First Day of the Week is Sunday. If this is changed to Tuesday, for example, then the total crew hours worked for the person computes starting on Tuesday and goes through the following Monday.

 

This change affects the WeekHrs calculation within the crew assignment grid within the Dispatch Center tab.

Figure 227: Crew Assignment grid

 

 

Read more about this functionality by referring to the WeekHrs field description within the Assign and Remove Crew topic.

 

This enhancement is part of our ongoing development of support for Office & Industrial Moves.

 

SUMMARY (8243)

First Day of the Week selector added to the System Wide Options.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Assign and Remove Crew

Schema Changes Version 2016R18

System Wide Options

 

Ability to Add a Note to a Quote Line Item and Quote Group

 

The ability to add a note to a line item or group is available for a Quote.

 

Figure 228: Quote tab

 

 

 

The Quote tab allows you to add a note to a line item or group by clicking on the note icon: . This opens a drop-down entry form where you can type in the contents of your message and press Save.

 

The text of the note associated to a group or a detail line item can be up to 1,024 characters in length.

 

Figure 229: Note dialog from Quote tab

 

Once a note associates to a group or line item, the application denotes this with a checked note icon: . You can edit saved notes.

 

Saved notes also display on the Quote Form.

 

Figure 230: Note examples form the Quote Form

 

Refer to the Quote topic for more information on notes for quote items and groups.

 

This enhancement is part of our ongoing development of support for Office & Industrial Moves.

 

SUMMARY (8274, 8354)

Added the ability to enter a note for a line item or group to a Quote.

Line and group notes display on the Quote Form.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Quote

Quote Form

Schema Changes Version 2016R18

 

Upgraded Development Tools

 

The compiler and infrastructure behind the generation of the MoversSuite application executables has been upgraded to the latest supported toolset. The benefits of this upgrade include employing current products that offers features such as DPI awareness for HD rendering by MoversSuite and other forward-thinking technologies.

 

With this change some features may work a little differently. One notable change is with the Calendar Control.

 

Figure 231: New Calendar Control

 

The current day displays at the top of the drop-down data selector. It is also a button that opens the month and year associated to the current date without closing the calendar.

 

Instead of having separate month and year selectors, the new control combines the month and year into one button. Clicking on the month and year button zooms the calendar out to cover a larger range. By default, the calendar displays the current month. Clicking on the current month/year link opens a list of all the months in the current year, each of which is a link to navigate to a particular month. Click this link again opens a decade view of each year. A last click of the date produces a listing of decades that you can use to zoom into.

 

Default display

After clicking “August 2016”

After clicking “2016”

After clicking “2010-2019”

 

At each calendar range, you can click on the arrow keys to navigate forward and backwards between values.

 

Refer to the Calendar Control topic for more information on this feature.

 

SUMMARY (8043)

Updated compiler tools and environment.

Updated Calendar Control is available.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Calendar Control

Date Fields

Day Notes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Order Information

 

Updated Times Used counter in Letter Management

The Times Used counter in Manage Letters now increments on a template record each that it is referenced to generate a document. Prior to this release, the counter updated only when the document was saved to the Document Management System. (8220)

 

Stores bookmark working in Letter Management

The Stores bookmark, which is specific to Special Services orders, displays correctly when a document generates. Refer to Special Services Bookmarks. (8366)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R18

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R18)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R18)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R18)

 

 

 

 

 

Version 2016 R17

 

RELEASE DATE: 8/15/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

7

Release Enhancements

12

Release Fixes

3

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

3

Admin Changes

1

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Application UI background color set to white

 

The dark blue color that accentuated the MoversSuite Application is now white. This change provides better visibility of text labels and functions and the changes provides a “cleaner” look throughout.

 

Figure 232: Contents Screen

 

SUMMARY (8318)

UI background color changed to white.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

MoversSuite Application

 

Dispatch Equipment Based on Quantity

 

Your company can now mark equipment as available to dispatch based on quantity, instead of by the hour. The new Dispatch based on quantity option is available within the Equipment Type Setup.

 

Figure 233: Equipment Type Setup

 

When this option is fully implemented on a future release of MoversSuite, the Dispatch based on quantity option, when checked, will instruct the application to dispatch this type of equipment on a quantity basis when making assignments through Local Dispatch.

 

Unchecking this option (the default), equipment is dispatched on an hourly basis.

 

This change is part of our continuing changes to better support O&I moves.

 

SUMMARY (8239)

Dispatch based on quantity flag added to Equipment Type Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Equipment Type Setup

Schema Changes Version 2016R17

 

Operational Plans functionality added to Requested Services

 

A new tab added to the Requested Services screen allows you to quickly view Operational Plan submissions along with all associated services submitted with the request to Local Dispatch.

 

Figure 234: Requested Operational Plans tab within Requested Services screen

 

 

The Requested Operational Plans tab provides the Accept Operational Plan option allowing you to clear the plan for dispatching.

 

Likewise, the Decline Operational Plan option allows you to send the plan back to Local Services for review and corrections.

 

The count of all services displaying within the Requested Operational Plans tab displays within the tab title. In the example below, 13 services are associated to plans listed within the tab. Note: Services associated to an Operational Plan do not show in the Requested Services tab.

 

Figure 235: Requested Services screen

 

Read more about this functionality through the Requested Operational Plans and Operational Plan topics.

 

SUMMARY (8201)

Requested Operational Plans added to Requested Services.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Requested Operational Plans

Requested Services

 

 

Import and Export through Letter Management

 

You now have the ability to export and import Word-formatted documents directly into Letter Management templates.

 

Two options are available to you through the File menu within the Letter Designer. They include the Import from File and Export to File options.

 

Figure 236: Letter Designer window

 

Use the Import from File option to import a Word file directly into the body of an open template. The application inserts the information into the template, replacing any data that may exist there. It also imports any Word Bookmarks from the file and converts them Letter Management Bookmarks.

 

You also have the ability to select the Export to File option to save the template to a Word file. This feature allows you to save the template as a file on your system and transfer it to another system, where it can be imported using the Import from File feature.

 

MoversSuite recommends that you import and export only Microsoft Word Document (.doc) or Word 2007 Document (.docx). Both of these formats fully support Letter Management Bookmarks.

 

Refer to the Letter Designer topic for more information.

 

NOTE

If your company utilizes custom phone types (defined within Shipper Phone Type Setup and Claim Phone Type Setup), then the application attempts to convert these into active phone type bookmarks. For example, if you have “Cell Phone” defined on one system and attempt to import a document into a separate system that also utilizes this phone type, then the application attempts to match on the description with the setup area. If no match is made, the bookmark is not imported; the bookmark remains as the text that represented the bookmark that you can update appropriately.

 

Additionally, the Letter Management system does not support Word Bookmarks of “coordphoneext,” “bphonex,” “phonewext.” The phone number extension for the related phone numbers is included in the phone number of the new-style Letter Management Bookmarks. The text placeholder for these bookmarks remains in the converted document, so you can readily identify them and update your new template accordingly.

 

 

SUMMARY (8199)

Import from File and Export to File options added to the Letter Designer.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Letter Designer

 

 

 

Capture New Payment Method from the Accounting Tools menu

 

A Capture Credit Card Information option is available through the Accounting Tools Menu. This option allows you to access the Capture New Payment Method screen from which you can capture payment information for future Electronic Payments and Recurring Electronic Payments.

 

Figure 237: Contents Screen

 

Prior to this release, the Capture New Payment Method option to access the screen was available only through the Payment Setup tab.

 

SUMMARY (8308)

Capture Credit Card Information option added to the Accounting Tools Menu.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Accounting Tools Menu

 

Limit Payment Types on Electronic Merchant

 

Your company can determine which payment types are available to users when capturing or processing Electronic Payments for a particular merchant service provider.

 

New options added to the Electronic Merchant Setup allow you to set which types are visible within the Credit Card/Bank Payment and Capture New Payment Method screens.

 

Figure 238: Electronic Merchant Setup

 

The new options available through this setup include:

Can Process Credit Cards

Can Process Bank Checking Accounts

Can Process Bank Savings Accounts

 

Example: If only the Can Process Credit Cards option is set, then only the Payment Type of “Credit Card” is available on either the Credit Card/Bank Payment and Capture New Payment Method screens.

 

Figure 239: Capture New Payment Method screen

 

 

SUMMARY (8316)

Options to determine which Payment Types display for a provider added to Electronic Merchant Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Capture New Payment Method

Credit Card/Bank Payment

Electronic Merchant Setup

Schema Changes Version 2016R17

 

Option added to associate Electronic Payment to Customer

 

We updated the Capture New Payment Method and Credit Card/Bank Payment screens by adding an Attach Credit Card To This Customer option that, when checked, stores the payment information for the customer.

 

Figure 240: Capture New Payment Method

 

Prior to this release, payment information automatically associated to the customer, which, in certain situations such as a van line or COD customer, caused a large number of references under a particular customer; this made it difficult to navigate through the large list of Payment Information On Hand option (within Credit Card/Bank Payment).

 

The Attach Credit Card To This Customer option is also available through the Credit Card/Bank Payment screen.

 

Figure 241: Credit Card/Bank Payment screen

 

Along with this change, we added a new option to the Credit Card/Bank Payment screen allowing those of you with appropriate privileges access to the Payment Method Management screen. Press the ellipses button  associated to the Payment Information On Hand option to access the Payment Method Management screen.

 

Figure 242: Credit Card/Bank Payment

 

 

MoversSuite also provides options to attach and remove a payment from a customer. These options are available through a right-click menu within the Payment Method Management screen.

 

Figure 243: Payment Method Management screen

 

Refer to the Electronic Payments, Payment Method Management, and Recurring Electronic Payments topics for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8345)

Requested Operational Plans added to Requested Services.

Attach Credit Card To Customer option added to Capture New Payment Method and Credit Card/Bank Payment.

Attach Card To Customer and Remove Customer From Card added as right-click options within Payment Method Management.

Access to the Payment Method Management screen available through Credit Card/Bank Payment.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Capture New Payment Method

Credit Card/Bank Payment

Payment Method Management

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Connections

 

Improved handling of <Type> tag on Pass Thru Connector

If an object that contains a <Type> property is encountered and the <Type> property is not set, the MoversConnect process now includes a NULL value for the <Type> property. This allows for the actual error, e.g. missing type, to return to the sending request. This change primarily affects the Pass Thru Connector. Refer to the NOTES section within Pass Thru Connector Upload Format for more information. (8307)

 

 

Electronic Payments

 

Improved error handling for Recurring Electronic Payments

The Recurring Electronic Payments process is improved to handle exceptions that result when the application encounters errors such as an incorrect URL or electronic merchant is not long configured correctly or active (Electronic Merchant Setup) and when a merchant service provider is non-responsive. When these types of errors are encountered, the application associates them to a MoversSuite error code and tracks them through the error handling system. This also allows for payments to be reprocessed through the Recurring Electronic Payments screen. (8327)

 

 

Local Dispatch and Long Distance Dispatch

 

Updated FastTrack CSV Email Eligibility

The application now checks the vanline associated to the order directly or by the branch set for the order to determine whether the service or trip associates to a UniGroup vanline (Mayflower, United) and is therefore eligible for the FastTrack CSV Email. Prior to this release, the check was only performed on the vanline associated to the order record (not the branch). (8266)

 

 

Order Information

 

Blank description on a quote group no longer causing error

When creating a group of Quote detail items, the application no longer allows you to leave the group description blank. On the previous release, this caused an error. Additionally, a new quote is automatically assigned a Quote Status of “Pending.” Previously, no status was assigned to the quote and a user had to manually set the status in order to save the record. (8317)

 

Support added for the bcsz bookmark in Letter Management

The old-style bcsz bookmark (Bookmarks) provides information on the branch city, state, and postal code (no street address) and is now supported by the new Letter Management system. The bcsz bookmark is included when old-style bookmark letters are imported into Letter Management (refer to the Import from existing Letter option within Manage Letters).

 

The bcsz bookmark is referenced in the new system under the title of Branch City, State, and Postal Code within the Insert Bookmark function. (8328)

 

Full phone number and extension display on reports

We modified a routine that retrieves order information for reports to account for larger phone numbers, such as the combined consignee phone number and phone number extension. The routine allows for phone numbers up to 30 characters, if there is no phone extension, and up to 42 characters, if the extension is included. This change affects several standard reports including the Work Ticket Report. (8213)

 

Order History shows actual user making Shipment Status History changes

Order History now shows the actual user that made changes within Shipment Status History (Set Shipment Status). Prior to this release, some of the changes made within Shipment Status History showed generically under the External Application user. (8205)

 

 

Payment Management

 

Negative Adjustments show on Payment Management Adjustments Report

Negative adjustment amounts created within Payment Application now show on the Payment Management Adjustments Report. (8186)

 

 

Revenue Entry

 

Reductions on reduced by other reductions calculates correctly

Calculations that include a reduction by other reductions now calculate correctly when the revenue item is added. Prior to this release, the calculation for reductions including other reductions only occurred if the revenue item reduction was edited. (8284).

 

Support for multiple third party vendors on same invoice

Microsoft Dynamics GP treats third party items separately and creates separate invoices and document numbers accordingly. This is true even if the third party items are on the same MoversSuite invoice. Prior to this release, if the application encountered multiple vendors on the same third party invoice, then they were combined into one invoice with one document number when imported into GP. MoversSuite now provides support for multiple vendors with the same invoice number and creates multiple document numbers accordingly.

 

To assist in this process, we updated the Add Third Party Item (Revenue Entry) dialog to allow the same invoice number to be assigned to multiple vendors. You now select the Vendor first.

 

Figure 244: Add Third Party

 

And, once you select a vendor, the Invoice Number filter displays only invoices that the particular vendor is associated with. The Invoice Number selector also includes the vendor information when the menu options are viewed.

 

 

Figure 245: Add Third Party

 

And, on the Summary tab, separate lines appear for third party items that have multiple vendors for the same invoice. (8315, 8329, 8330)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

View the database changes that affect this release through the following link:

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R17

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R17)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R17)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R17)

 

 

 

 

Version 2016 R16

 

RELEASE DATE: 8/1/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

5

Release Enhancements

2

Release Fixes

0

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

1

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Create New Template from Existing Word Letter

 

You now have the option to convert old-style bookmark Microsoft Word documents into new Letter Management templates. A new feature added to the Manage Letters screen allows you to select from a list of reports formatted as a report type of “Letter;” these documents typically utilize the old-style Bookmark Fields.

 

Figure 246: Manage Letters screen

 

Once you select one of these existing documents, MoversSuite prompts you to enter the Letter Template Properties for a new document. The application then converts this document into a template and makes it immediately available, i.e. users that have access to the report prior to conversion have access to the newly converted one without administration changes.

 

The import process not only generates a new template based on the pre-existing letter, but also supports existing bookmarks. For example, if your letter contains the “coord” bookmark, then the text of the converted bookmark continues to remain “coord,” however the conversion links to the supported Transportation Coordinator (Order Information) bookmark (found under the Order Information Bookmarks).

 

Of note, the following Bookmark Fields (old style) are not supported as Letter Management Bookmarks (new style). These bookmarks are not replaced, so please take appropriate steps to make corrections to your documents after they import.

 

Bookmarks not supported by the Letter Management system and not imported into converted templates:

 

Unsupported Bookmark

Description

bcsz

Displays the city, state, and zip of the branch associated to the order. This information is available in Letter Management as separate bookmark fields (refer to Branch Address and related bookmarks within the Order Information Bookmarks listing).

Note: The bcsz bookmark will be supported in MoversSuite Version 2016 R17 release.

bphonex

Evokes the phone number extension associated to the branch of the order. This value is available within the Letter Management as a separate bookmark field (refer to Branch Phone within the Order Information Bookmarks listing, which includes the phone number and phone extension of the branch).

coordphoneext

Displays the extension for the work phone of the transportation coordinator on the order. This information is available in Letter Management as separate bookmark field (the phone extension is included in the Transportation Coordinator Work Phone bookmark listed within the Order Information Bookmarks).

phonewext

Displays the extension for the work phone of the shipper on the order. This information is available in Letter Management as separate bookmark field (the phone extension is included in the Origin Work Phone bookmark listed within the Order Information Bookmarks).

 

 

Did you know?

You can select any non-bookmarked text within the Letter Designer and convert it into a bookmark.

Example: If you select “Any word” and link it to the Shipper Name bookmark, the text continues to read “Any word,” however when a document generates based on this template, the text is replaced with the actual name of the shipper.

 

 

SUMMARY (8271)

Import from Existing Letter option added to Manage Letters.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Manage Letters

 

 

 

More Letter Management Bookmarks Available

 

29 new bookmarks have been added to the Letter Management system. The following is a list of new fields ordered by the group they list under.

 

Added to the list of Military Bookmarks:

Destination Base Address Line 1

Destination Base Address Line 2

Destination Base Address Line 3

Destination Base City

Destination Base Country Name

Destination Base Fax

Destination Base Name

Destination Base Phone

Destination Base Postal Code

Destination Base State

 

Added to the list of Order Information Bookmarks:

Booking Agent City

Booking Agent Contact Name

Booking Agent Country Name

Booking Agent Phone

Booking Agent Postal Code

Booking Agent State

Booking Agent Street Address

 

Destination Agent Contact Name

 

Hauling Agent City

Hauling Agent Contact Name

Hauling Agent Country Name

Hauling Agent ID

Hauling Agent Name

Hauling Agent Phone

Hauling Agent Postal Code

Hauling Agent State

Hauling Agent Street Address

 

Special Instructions – Destination

Special Instructions - Origin

 

 

SUMMARY (8206, 8211)

29 new bookmarks added to those available through the Insert Bookmark function.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Military Bookmarks

Order Information Bookmarks

 

 

 

O&I: Filter and Synchronize Crew and Equipment Based on their Role or Type

 

Those of you working in Local Dispatch now have the option to filter the list of crew and equipment by the person’s role or by the equipment type. You also have the ability to synchronize the filter to match what is requested for the selected service by pressing the synchronize button .

 

Figure 247: Assignment grids within the Dispatch Center

 

The filter menu for crew assignments allows you to select which personnel list in the crew grid. This reduces the number of crew members displaying in the grid to just those associated to the selected role or roles.

 

Figure 248: Crew assignment grid

 

Further, pressing the synchronize button  automatically performs the role filtering based on what is requested for the selected service, based on what is entered for the Labor Request within Add Local Service. For example, if a service request includes roles for Packer and Local Driver, then only those crew members that have corresponding roles display in the crew assignment grid.

 

The equipment filtering and synchronization works the same way as that for the crew assignment grid. The filtering is based on the equipment type and the synchronization is based on what is set for the selected services through the Equipment Request within Add Local Service.

 

Figure 249: Equipment assignment grid

 

This change is part of our continuing changes to better support O&I moves.

 

SUMMARY (8234)

Filtering and synchronization functions added to the crew and equipment assignment grids within Local Dispatch.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Dispatch Center

 

 

 

O&I: Default Branch and Hire Date added to Crew Assignment Grid

 

The Default Branch set for the employee along wither Hire Date have been added to the crew assignment grid within Local Dispatch.

Figure 250: Crew Assignment grid

 

The Default Branch and Hire Date are set for employees through Personnel Setup.

 

This change is part of our continuing changes to better support O&I moves.

 

SUMMARY (8233)

Default Branch and Hire Date added to the crew assignment grid within Local Dispatch.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Dispatch Center

 

 

 

Turn On/Off MoversSuite Email Service

 

Your company can turn on the MoversSuite Email Service by unchecking the Use default email service (turn off MoversSuite Email) option within the System Wide Options.

 

Figure 251: System Wide Options

 

When this option is checked, the mail service referenced to send email messages from MoversSuite relies on the default mail server loaded onto the application server of the one referenced through SMTP Setup.

 

Refer to MoversSuite Email Service for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8305)

Use default email service (turn off MoversSuite Email) option added to System Wide Options.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

System Wide Options

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Connections Fixes

 

Equipment Import Scripts Added

Scripts are available to import equipment and related safety records directly into the MoversSuite database from a spreadsheet. The scripts affect the Equip and SafetySystemEquipment tables (Equipment Setup records). These scripts are primarily used for MoversSuite personnel to import these records as part of a new installation. (7729)

 

 

Order Information Fixes

 

Updated Save option added to Letter Designer

The option to Save and Close now replace the Save Template and Cancel options within the Letter Designer window. Additionally, if the application recognizes that changes have been made, you receive a prompt confirmation if you attempt to close the screen without saving.

 

Figure 252: Save Changes prompt

 

Prior to this release, pressing Save Template closed the screen as well. (8272)

 

 

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

NO SCHEMA CHANGES FOR THIS RELEASE

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R16)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R16)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R16)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R15

 

RELEASE DATE: 7/18/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

2

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

6

Release Fixes

7

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

2

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

NEW PRODUCT FEATURES

 

Standalone MoversSuite Email Service   

 

MoversSuite offers an integrated email service that provides email messaging directly from the MoversSuite application. The new MoversSuite Email Service allows MoversSuite to operate without relying on a full integration to an external mail service, such as Microsoft Outlook.

 

You can utilize the MoversSuite Email Service to open an email dialog from several locations throughout the application. Further, the service makes order personnel and others tied to the order available to you to assign as email recipients. Order Number and Shipper Name display directly within the email form for quick reference and, another big improvement, is the ability to attach order documents directly to the email message.

 

Figure 253: MoversSuite Email

 

The MoversSuite Email form contains many features common in most mail forms, such as the ability to insert text and images, print, add a signature, check spelling, and more.

 

Unique to MoversSuite Email is that the Order Number and Shipper Name of the specific order record being viewed display within the mail form. This allows you to open multiple email forms for multiple orders and not lose track of which one you are on.

 

Further, clicking one of the recipient buttons (To, Cc, Bcc) opens the Add Email Address dialog allowing you to select one or more personnel associated to the order and add them to the list of recipients on the email.

Figure 254: Add Email Address

 

You can access the new email form from the Email option available through the Tools Menu and through key locations within MoversSuite, such as through reports, clicking on the shipper email within Name, Address, Phone tab, and from the Agents tab.

 

Specific to the Agents tab, is access to various contacts for the agent when the mail icon () is clicked.

 

Figure 255: Email option within Agents tab

 

 

The MoversSuite Email Service works independent of any email service you may have running locally, such as Microsoft Outlook. The impetus behind this change is to provide a low cost solution for our Cloud customers. In future releases, MoversSuite will entail a bookmark and Microsoft Word replacement as part of our Production Pack. This pack will allow our customers to have all the primary communication tools they need without relying and paying for additional software.

 

View the MoversSuite Email Service topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (7363, 8155)

MoversSuite Email Service added.

Send emails directly from various locations throughout MoversSuite:

Account Profile

Agents

Claim Detail

Military/Government

Name, Address, Phone

Order Details

Shipping Information

 

New Tools Menu option of Email added.

Added the ability to add contacts to agent records through Agent Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this feature:

Account Profile

Agent Setup

Agents

Branch Setup

Claim Detail

Military/Government

MoversSuite Email Service

Name, Address, Phone

Shipping Information

Tools Menu

Van Line Setup

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Automatic Recurring Billing Email

 

Available for Recurring Billing and Storage and Recurring Electronic Payments is now the ability to automatically email invoices and cash receipts generated through a billing run to the email address or addresses associated to the Recurring Billing record.

 

You assign an email address or addresses to the billing record through the Payment Setup tab. This enables the record for emails to generate automatically through a billing run.

 

Figure 256: Payment Setup tab

 

When Recurring Billing and Storage generates payments, invoices for those payments are attached to an email and automatically sent to the email address or addresses specified on the Payment Setup tab.

 

Additionally, if the Billing Record is setup for Electronic Payments and the Payment Method is sent, an email including the cash receipt for the Recurring Electronic Payments item is also sent as part of the billing run.

 

A sample invoice email message generated automatically through this system displays below.

 

Figure 257: Sample automatic email for storage

 

The system also updates Document Management with a copy of the invoice and cash receipt generated.

 

An updated Report Viewer provides options for the invoices and cash receipts. Two separate Report Viewer windows open for each type of report generated for the billing run (one for invoices and one for cash receipts, if processing Electronic Payments).

 

Figure 258: Report Viewer options

 

Additional information and options are available through the Report Viewer. They include the ability to see which records have at least one email address associated to the billing record () and those that have none (). You can also select all invoices that are setup for recurring billing email () or select all that are not (). The application combines all selected records into a single email, complete with all invoices (or cash receipts) attached. If you wish to generate an email for a single payment, then verify that only one record is selected and press the email button ().

 

When the Report Viewer initially appears, all the invoices associated to records setup for recurring billing email are unselected. This informs you that email message have already been sent out for these records.

 

Your company also has the ability to set the content of the email message. A new System Email Setup allows you to set the default subject and body of the email messages generated through Recurring Billing and Storage run complete with placeholders () for placement of up to four order attributes:

Cash Receipt Number

Invoice Amount

Invoice Number

Order Number

 

The following image is the default System Email Setup settings provided for each email type generated through a billing run. The Recurring Billing section details the subject and body of the message issued for a recurring billing invoice and the Recurring Cash Receipts outlines the subject and body of the email for an electronic payment generated during the billing run.

 

Figure 259: System Email Setup

 

Read more about this subject through the Electronic Payments Setup and Administration, Payment Setup, Report Viewer, System Email Setup topics.

 

SUMMARY (8222, 8252)

Added System Email Setup to customize the text of the message sent to customers for invoices and cash receipts generated through Recurring Billing and Storage.

New options added to the Report Viewer to identify which invoices and cash receipts associate to billing records setup for email.

Duplicate Prefix values no longer allowed within Cash Receipt Numbers Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Cash Receipt Numbers Setup

Electronic Payments Setup and Administration

Payment Setup

Report Viewer

System Email Setup

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Streamline Quote Entry

 

The Quote tab allows you to quickly add and edit line items and groups in a streamlined manner. Instead of opening a separate dialog screens to manage and add quotes items, the updated Quote tab provides an inline add and edit ability directly from the main grid.

 

Figure 260: Quote tab

 

New options added to this tab allow you to create a blank quote or to duplicate an existing quote.

 

Figure 261: Create option within Quote tab

 

Press Edit to places the grid in edit mode and enter new records by clicking in the Item column and beginning making selections to the row. Navigate between columns by pressing the Tab key.

Figure 262: Item selector in Edit mode within Quote tab

 

Select one or more items and press Group to create a grouped listing of line items. Use a new line menu () to create duplicates or to remove line items.

 

Figure 263: Right-click option within Edit mode within Quote tab

 

View the Quote topic for more information on this feature.

 

SUMMARY (8164)

Updated Quote tab.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Quote

 

Security added to Recurring Electronic Payments

 

Users with “Full” security access to the Electronic Payment Management module have the option to update the Payment Method of a Recurring Billing record through the Payment Setup tab.

 

Figure 264: Security Profile Setup

 

With this module enabled for a particular branch, users have access to the Payment Method Management screen available through the edit button (  ) within the Payment Setup tab; this button does not display if the user does not have appropriate security privileges.

 

Figure 265: Payment Setup tab

 

The Payment Method Management screen lists all payment methods saved for the order.

 

Figure 266: Payment Method Management screen

 

From this screen, you can mark a payment method as active or inactive and update the nickname.

 

Figure 267: Payment Method Management screen

 

Users must have “Full” access to the Electronic Payment Management module to access this screen. Refer to Electronic Payments Setup and Administration and Security Modules for more information.

 

The Nick Name assists those making an assignment to through the Payment Setup tab.

 

Figure 268: Payment Method sample options

 

 

SUMMARY (8254)

New Payment Method Management screen available through Payment Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Capture New Payment Method

Payment Method Management

Payment Setup

Security Modules

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Connections Fixes

 

Order Information Data View updated to pull correct agent information

The vOrderInformation Data View now pulls the correct agent information for all four agent types (Booking, Hauling, Destination, Origin). (8214)

 

Convert MSS External Interface to Windows service

The process that monitors and transfers messages for external application integrations now utilizes a standard Windows API service. Prior to this release, the processes were managed through the Internet Information Services (IIS) for Windows.

 

This changes provides a more robust way of managing services for external application integrations. (6718)

 

 

Electronic Payments Fixes

 

Electronic Payments available through Current Driver Activity tab

Dispatchers working in Long Distance Dispatch now have the right-click option of Credit Card/Bank Payment allowing them to process an electronic payment for the selected order. (8277)

 

Manager Flag needed to issue refund or void electronic payment

If your company utilizes Electronic Payments functionality, then the users you wish to refund or void electronic payments must have the Manager Flag set on the Cash Receipts security module for each branch (refer to the Security Profile Setup section within Electronic Payments Setup and Administration for more information). (8237)

 

 

Local Dispatch and Local Services Fixes

 

Service date not available for crew and equipment assignments in Quick View

MoversSuite does not store the service dates to individual crew and equipment records, therefore the service date was removed from the Local Service Quick View. (8257)

 

 

Order Information Fixes

 

Updated format for saved Letter Management templates

The application now saves document templates created through the Letter Management system as a Microsoft Word Open XML (DOCX) formatted file internally within MoversSuite. This change allows for improved compatibility for formatting between the template and the documents generated from the template.

 

Note that an option within the Letter Management screen allows you to convert and save any documents created using the old format to the new format. The option appears automatically when you select a document saved using the old format. (8270)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R15

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R15)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R15)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R15)

 

 

Version 2016 R13

 

RELEASE DATE: 6/20/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

2

New Product Features

3

Release Enhancements

6

Release Fixes

9

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

1

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

NEW PRODUCT FEATURES

 

Recurring Electronic Payments   http://www.ewsgroup.com/moverssuite/support/onlinehelp/2016R12/index.htm

 

If your company is setup for Electronic Payments, then you can utilize the new Recurring Electronic Payments system to setup and process electronic payments automatically through a storage billing run.

 

A new Payment Setup tab is available within Recurring Billing allows to capture the electronic payment information.

 

Figure 269: Recurring Billing section of the SIT/Recurring Billing tab

 

This tab allows you to select a method of payment to apply for the billing record. If the option you need is not already defined as a Payment Method, then you can add a new payment option through the

Capture New Payment Method screen.

 

Figure 270: Capture New Payment Method screen

 

Once payment data is established, you can run storage billing as you typically do, and those accounts that you have setup for Electronic Payments process in a separate Recurring Payment Processing screen. This screen automatically appears once the batch generates.

 

From the Recurring Payment Processing screen, you can monitor the progress of the payment processing, export the details of the payments, and reprocess any or all payments that received a processing error.

 

Figure 271: Recurring Payment Processing

.

The Recurring Payment Processing screen is available for any storage run that contains Electronic Payments and is available through the View Payments option available from within Recurring Billing Management. A count of the number of autopay items is also available from this screen.

 

Figure 272: Recurring Billing Management

 

As with other Electronic Payments, a cash receipt generates for each payment item and is available through Cash Receipts and Payment Management modules for further processing.

 

Please see the Recurring Electronic Payments topic and watch the video () on this subject for more information.

 

SUMMARY (7971)

Recurring Electronic Payments available within MoversSuite.

Payment Setup added to Recurring Billing.

Recurring Payment Processing (View Payments option) and Auto-Payments column dded to Recurring Billing Management.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Capture New Payment Method

Electronic Payments

Electronic Payments Setup and Administration

Payment Setup

Recurring Billing

Recurring Billing Management

Recurring Electronic Payments

Recurring Payment Processing

Schema Changes Version 2016R13

 

 

 

 

Quick View of Local Service Information is now available

 

We modified the Local Services tab in Order Information to offer a quick view of service data directly from the tab. Many of you have requested additional columns be added to the Local Services grid, instead we thought that it would be more effective to produce a viewing pane that displays the most useful information in an easy-to-read pane with collapsible sections.

 

The new Local Service Quick View section displays automatically when you open the Local Services tab.

 

Figure 273: Local Services tab

 

 

The following table lists the sections containing information available through the Local Service Quick View.

 

Section

Field Location

Day Note

The Day Note for the service date displays.

Addresses

Moving From, Moving To – Primary or Moving To – Secondary address from Name, Address, Phone tab display

Labor Requirements

Number of requested personnel by role display. This data pulls from the Labor Request screen.

Equipment Requirements

Number of requested items by equipment type display. This data pulls from the Equipment Request screen.

Containers, Packing and Unpacking

Estimated quantities specified through Update Containers, Packing and Unpacking display.

Assigned Crew

This section lists the personnel assigned to the service through Local Dispatch.

Assigned Equipment

This section lists the equipment assignments made to the service through Local Dispatch.

 

A section displays only if data exists. For example, if there are no crew assignments, then the Assigned Crew section does not display.

 

The count of items for the particular section also appears in the title in parenthesis. For example, if there is a total of 16 items requested through Equipment Request for the service, then title displays as “Equipment Requirement (16).”

 

Figure 274: Equipment Requirements section

 

You can also access the Local Service Quick View through Local Dispatch. The option is available through a new right click option of Local Service Quick View.

 

Figure 275: Right-click options within the Dispatch Center

 

In Local Dispatch, the Local Service Quick View opens as a separate screen that remains open while you work. The screen switches automatically to reflect the current service selected within the Dispatch Center grid.

Figure 276: Local Service Quick View

 

View the Local Service Quick View topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (8183, 8200)

Local Service Quick View added to Local Services and Local Dispatch.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Local Service Quick View

Local Services

Dispatch Center

Requested Services

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Item Code Mapping option added to MoversSuite Administration

 

The option to launch the Item Code Generation screen is available through Item Code Setup within MoversSuite Administration. The Item Code Mapping option, which opens Item Code Generation screen, is now available when in Item Code Setup and you click listing options menu ().

 

Figure 277: Listing Options within Item Code Setup

 

Users must have appropriate security access to the Item Code role through MoversSuite Administration in order to access this feature.

 

 

IMPORTANT

With changes made to this version of MoversSuite, the installation/upgrade process now installs the MoversSuiteAdmin.exe and MoversSuiteAdmin.udl files automatically for you. Therefore, you no longer need to manually copy these files.

 

 

SUMMARY (7928)

Item Code Mapping option added to Item Code Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Item Code Setup

 

 

 

 

Shipper Name and Customer added to Container Management

 

We added the name and customer associated to an order to list of available columns within the Container Management data grid.

 

Figure 278: Container Management screen

 

The following columns are now available that you can group and sort by:

 

Column

Field Location

Shipper

Name, Address, Phone > First Name/MI and Last Name/Company Name

Customer

Billing Information > Customer Name (Number)

 

 

SUMMARY (8091)

Shipper (name) and Customer (name and number) added to the data grid within New Container Management.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Container Management

 

 

 

 

Load records in main Claims grid based on Claim Status

 

Your company can define which claim records you see when you press Find to load the main Claims data grid. A new Load by Default flag is available within Claim Status Setup that, when checked, instructs MoversSuite to always display claims with this status.

 

Figure 279: Example Claim Status Setup record

 

When you initially access the Claims module and press Find to build your list of claims to work, only those records with a status that has the Load By Default flag set.

 

Figure 280: Claims tab

 

 

Leaving the Load By Default option unchecked instructs MoversSuite not to display certain claim records, such as those that you consider closed.

 

Figure 281: Example Claim Status Setup record

 

The Find utilized within the Claims module only returns records with a Claim Status that is checked to Load By Default. Otherwise, you must implicitly select the status values you wish to include in your search. In the example below (Figure 282: Find in Claims), if you wish to include “Closed” claims in your search and your company does not load this type by default, then check this option within the Claim Status setting within the Find. Otherwise, claims associated to status values that do not load by default do not show in the search results.

 

Figure 282: Find in Claims

 

MoversSuite checks this flag for all existing Claim Status Setup records. It is up to your company to decide which status values you wish to not load by default.

 

SUMMARY (8229)

Load by Default option added to Claim Status Setup.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Claim Status Setup

Schema Changes Version 2016R13

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Connections Fixes

 

Lead flag set on download

If a lead downloads into MoversSuite, through processes such as SIRVA QLAB Lead/Opportunity Download and UniGroup Quotes to Go, MoversSuite sets the appropriate flag to indicate a lead. Prior to this fix, on some downloads the lead flag was not set, which caused reporting to be off (Closing Ratios Report). (7801)

 

Order dates not updated on EasyDPS download

A new flag is available that instructs the Pass Thru Connector to not update order dates if set. The new flag is titled KeepExistingDates and is set to “1” by default on all EasyDPS download request. Therefore, the application sets the order dates on the initial download but does not on any subsequent download. Refer to the KeepExistingDates description within the Pass Thru Connector Upload Format topic for more information. (8221)

 

SIT data handling updated on downloads

Several changes are available that affect how SIT data is handled when downloaded into MoversSuite. One of the changes includes recognizing if the inbound agency includes a leading van line affiliation or not. If it does, the affiliation is removed for agency identification. Refer to the OverwriteExistingSitData description (under SitInfos section) within the Pass Thru Connector Upload Format topic for more information.

 

Another change includes recognizing when a date field should be set to null. For example, if the incoming data includes a date of “1900-01-01”, then application interprets this as a NULL date within MoversSuite. Refer to the Notes section at the top of the Pass Thru Connector Upload Format topic for more information. (8228)

 

 

Local Dispatch Fixes

 

Services in Local Dispatch no longer change position

Prior to this release, certain actions on a service, such as generating a work ticket on assigning crew, caused the selected service to move down in the grid and become unselected. This issue is now fixed and now only the sorting in effect on the grid affects the data display. (7536)

 

Dispatchers can assign crew with last name only

MoversSuite now allows you to assign crew members with only the last name set within their Personnel Setup record to a service. Prior to this change, users received an error attempting to assign a crew member that did not have the first name set. (8185)

 

 

Recurring Billing Fixes

 

Only create Recurring Billing for non-lead records

MoversSuite only allows you to establish a Recurring Billing and Storage record on an order. If the record is a lead, the New button within the Recurring Billing section is disabled. (5420)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R13

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R13)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R13)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R13)

 

 

Version 2016 R12

 

RELEASE DATE: 6/6/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

1

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

5

Release Fixes

2

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

0

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

NEW PRODUCT FEATURES

 

Operational Plans are now available   http://www.ewsgroup.com/moverssuite/support/onlinehelp/2016R12/index.htm

 

Your company can now manage services as part of operation plans linked to single MoversSuite order. You can define multiple operational plans for the order each containing any number of local service requests.

 

The Operational Plan option is available when creating or editing local services through the Add Local Service screen. Simply enter a new plan name to create an Operational Plan or select from the list of existing ones for the particular order.

 

Figure 283: Add Local Service screen

 

Operational Plans are order-specific, meaning that the plan names you enter for one or more services are only available for that order. You can view all the services associated to a particular plan through the new Operational Plan column within the Local Services data grid.

 

Figure 284: Local Services tab

 

You can send the entire plan or plans for an order to Local Dispatch at one time. The Send to Dispatch dialog provides a new option to include all services linked to a plan.

 

Figure 285: Send to Dispatch dialog

 

Dispatchers can readily identify the plans and assign accordingly.

 

Figure 286: Dispatch Center grid in Local Services

 

Read more about this subject through the Operational Plan topic.

 

SUMMARY (8182)

Operational Plan available within MoversSuite for Local Services.

Operational Plan column added to the grids in Dispatch Center, Local Services, and Requested Services.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Add Local Service

Dispatch Center

Local Services

Operational Plan

Requested Services

Schema Changes Version 2016R12

Send to Dispatch

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Set Service Request Times for Local Services

 

You now have the ability to request the start and end times of a service. The new Service Time setting within Add Local Service allows you provide this information along with the service sent to dispatch.

 

 

Figure 287: Add Local Service screen

 

This information lists within data grids in Local Services and within Local Dispatch.

 

Figure 288: Dispatch Center data grid

 

Of note, if there is a starting time and no ending time specified, the application indicates this with “Starts at” phrasing for the new Requested Time Range column. Likewise, if no starting time is specified with an end time, the application displays “Ends at.”

 

These requested service times also appear as the default times provided to the dispatcher through the Set Service Time function.

 

Figure 289: Dispatch Center featuring the Set Service Time dialog

 

 

SUMMARY (8181)

Service Time fields added to Add Local Service. These times provide defaults within the Set Service Time dialog.

Requested Time Range column added to the grids in Dispatch Center, Local Services, and Requested Services.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Add Local Service

Dispatch Center

Local Services

Requested Services

Schema Changes Version 2016R12

 

 

 

New Military Scores Data View available

 

The vPRMilitaryScores Data View is now part of the list of those available through MoversSuite Data Views. This view provides the details of military move, including the TSP Score, for a military order with a completed survey date (based on the CSS Completion Date found on the Military/Government tab).

 

View the vPRMilitaryScores Data View topic for specifics on this view.

 

NOTE

If your company currently has a view with the same name installed on your system, then the application overwrites this view with the new, official view when you upgrade to this version of MoversSuite.

 

 

SUMMARY (8119)

New MoversSuite Data Views view titled vPRMilitaryScores Data View is available.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

MoversSuite Data Views

vPRMilitaryScores Data View

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Claims Fixes

 

Claims allows orders with per pound valuation

You can now add a claim for an order with valuation based on a per pound amount. Prior to this release, users attempting to create a claim record through Claims received an error if the order contained Per Pound valuation or if the valuation was not associated to a van line. (6161)

 

 

Integrations Fixes

 

Hauling Agent contact information updates on UniGroup Dispatch Downloads

The contact information for the hauling agent on an order now updates upon a Dispatch Download from UniGroup. This data includes the contact name and phone number, etc. for the Hauling Agent managed through the Agents tab. (7990)

 

Queue Service no longer locks up    

If the Queue Service references the physical configuration file instead of relying on the database configuration information, the Queue Service would lock up. The Queue Service no longer hangs or locks up when references a configuration file as its source. (8215)

 

 

Local Services and Dispatching Fixes

 

CPU button displays in bold font

The CPU button within now displays in a bold-weighted font when counts are set for the service. (8188)

 

Figure 290: Add/Edit Local Service dialog

 

 

Order Information Fixes

 

Phone numbers included on new duplicate orders

The Create Duplicate Order function now includes all phone numbers associated to a copied order into the new order. (8125)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R12

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R12)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R12)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R12)

 

 

Version 2016 R11

 

RELEASE DATE: 5/23/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

1

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

6

Release Fixes

14

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

1

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

NEW PRODUCT FEATURES

 

MoversSuite now supports Electronic Payments

 

Your company now has the ability to process electronic payments, such as credit cards or bank payment. The new Electronic Payments system allows you capture payment information and process it through a MoversSuite provided electronic merchant provider.

 

Figure 291: Credit Card/Bank Payment screen

 

Please refer to the Electronic Payments topic to learn more about this subject. A video is also available that provides an overview of Electronic Payments system ().

 

A modified version of the Customer Find is now available through the Credit Card/Bank Payment screen that allows you to update the customer on the order based on what customer you select and add to the payment.

 

Figure 292: Customer Find opened through Credit Card/Bank Payment screen

 

 

SUMMARY (7936)

Electronic Payments system and related Electronic Merchant Setup added.

Customer Find updated to include the Update the customer on the order to be the selected customer option. This option is only available when evoking the through the Set Customer button from within the Credit Card/Bank Payment screen.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Accounting Tools Menu

AR Detail

Customer Find

Electronic Merchant Setup

Electronic Payments

Schema Changes Version 2016R11

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

Request Equipment and Labor through Local Services

 

Those of you working in Local Services now have the ability to request personnel and equipment for a service request. The application passes this information along with the service request to the dispatcher where they can utilize this information to make correct crew and equipment assignments.

 

This is the first development in working towards providing solutions for O&I moves.

 

Two new buttons are available to you through Add Local Service: Labor Request and Equipment Request.

 

Figure 293: Add Local Service screen

 

The Labor Request opens a new Labor Request dialog. From here, you can enter the anticipated number of people to assign to the service based on role (active Labor Types available for the Local Dispatch module).

 

Figure 294: Labor Request dialog

 

A similar dialog is available for Equipment Request. Pressing Equipment Request from Add Local Service allows you to enter the anticipated number of items you feel are necessary for the service (from Equipment Types defined on your system).

 

Figure 295: Equipment Request dialog

 

This information is available to dispatchers by editing the service from the Dispatch Center grid.

 

SUMMARY (7941)

Labor Request and Equipment Request functionality added to Add Local Service window.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Add Local Service

Equipment Request

Labor Request

Schema Changes Version 2016R11

 

 

 

Additional Letter Management Bookmarks

 

We have added over 100 new bookmarks that you can access for your custom letters and forms created through Letter Management. New bookmarks include those for military and SIT information.

 

Figure 296: Insert Bookmark dialog

 

These new bookmarks are only available through Letter Management. View the Letter Management Bookmarks topic for a complete list of available bookmarks.

 

SUMMARY (7635)

Additional Letter Management Bookmarks added to the Letter Management system.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Letter Management

Letter Management Bookmarks

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Integrations Fixes

 

UniGroup Dispatch Downloads show in Order History

Updates affecting an order from changes made through a dispatch downloads from UniGroup now show in the Order History. Prior to this release, Order History recorded that a field changed but did not list the source of the change, e.g. “UniGroup Dispatch Download.” (8104)

 

 

Order Information Fixes

 

Equipment hours update correctly in Job Costing

Updated equipment hours for service times reflect correctly within Job Costing. Prior to this release, updates to the number of hours for an equipment reservation did not show up. (8041)

 

Extra space in bookmarks removed

No longer is there an extra space after a Letter Management Bookmarks when replaced by MoversSuite data upon document generation. (8192)

 

 

Payment Management Fixes

 

Correct transactions display on the Payment Management Adjustments Report

The Payment Management Adjustments Report now displays adjustment transactions, rather than showing the original transaction associated to the adjustment. (8095)

 

Inactive GL accounts no longer available

Users working within the Payment Application screen no longer can select an inactive GL account within the Journal Entry section. (8063)

 

 

Revenue Entry Fixes

 

Change information on generated revenue items

A user can modify data for several fields for generated revenue items provided the item is not on an invoice. However, a recent change to the Save menu within Add Revenue Item prevented users from updating the Invoice Description, EDI Description, and the Invoice flag. With this release, users can change these three fields for non-invoiced, generated revenue items. (8097)

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R11

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R11)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R11)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R11)

 

 

Version 2016 R10

 

RELEASE DATE: 5/9/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

1

New Product Features

0

Release Enhancements

3

Release Fixes

3

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

2

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

NEW PRODUCT FEATURES

 

Integrated MoversSuite Letter Design and Management Tools Available

 

MoversSuite provides an integrated letter creation and generation product with the introduction of the Letter Management system. This system allows your company to design document templates that contain MoversSuite data directly from within the MoversSuite application. These templates are available to users to generate well-formed and useful letters and forms that can be printed, emailed, and attached to the Document Management system.

 

Figure 297: Letter Designer with bookmarks

 

Read more about this new system through the Letter Management topic.

 

SUMMARY (7506)

New Letter Management system containing Letter Designer and Manage Letters.

Manage Letter Templates option added to the Tools Menu.

New System Location setting in Report Setup, which replaces System Report ID.

New Report Type of MoversSuite Letters is available in Report Setup, which is a type specific to the templates created through Manage Letters.

Letter Management module added to Security Modules added (assignable through Security Profile Setup)

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Letter Designer

Manage Letters

Letter Management

Report Setup

Security Modules

Security Profile Setup

Tools Menu

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

No new product enhancements introduced with this version.

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Dispatching Fixes

 

Access Violation error in Local Dispatch Fixed

Users accessing the module encountered an Access Violation error periodically when opening the module. This issue was a result of the user having a Default Branch (Branch tab within Personnel Setup) that was not set up to access the Local Dispatch module (Security Profile Setup). Now, if the Default Branch is not set, MoversSuite defaults the Service Branch within Local Dispatch to the first branch having access to the Local Dispatch module. (4219)

 

 

Integrations Fixes

 

“Mobile” phone type referenced correctly on FastTrack CSV

The application now includes “mobile” as a supported phone type when generating a FastTrack CSV Email. Prior to this fix, the application checked for the a type of “cell” only within the list of phone numbers for an order (Name, Address, Phone) for inclusion as a Origin Phone Number within the CSV file. (8111)

 

 

Revenue Entry Fixes

 

Timeout on adding commissions

O&I-related moves under one order linked to 25 or more sub-orders (under POS segments) no longer cause a timeout in Revenue Entry when adding commissions. Additionally, the performance of adding commissions to an order is improved. (8166)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R10

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R10)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R10)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R10)

 

 

 

 

Version 2016 R09

 

RELEASE DATE: 4/25/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

0

Release Enhancements

3

Release Fixes

0

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

0

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

NEW PRODUCT FEATURES

 

No new product features introduced with this version.

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

No new product enhancements introduced with this version.

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Dispatching Fixes

 

Display issues with Local Dispatch grids

The data grids within Local Dispatch now display assigned crew correctly. Prior to this fix, the data grids did not render correctly in certain scenarios depending on which version of Microsoft SQL Server was in use. (8036)

 

 

Integrations Fixes

 

Order data not updated on Atlas Rating Import

Order information, such as the shipper name, no longer updates when revenue imports through an Atlas Revenue Import. Now, only revenue information updates on such imports. (8084)

 

Discounted Linehaul set on UniGroup Rating Order Download

MoversSuite now sets the Discounted Linehaul on all UniGroup Rating Order Downloads. Prior to this change, if a special method of calculating the invoice amount was in use, the Discounted Linehaul was not set on the Rating Order download (it was set correctly on the Rating download). (8028)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

No schema changes for this version.

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R09)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R09)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R09)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R08

 

RELEASE DATE: 4/11/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

0

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

1

Release Fixes

1

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

1

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

NEW PRODUCT FEATURES

 

No new product features introduced with this version.

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

 

Application Title Message

 

You company can define a message that displays on the title bar of the MoversSuite application.

 

Figure 298: MoversSuite Contents screen

 

A new setting within the System Wide Options allows you to set a message up to 120 characters that display on all stand-alone MoversSuite windows.

 

Figure 299: System Wide Options

 

The Custom Title appears on the following MoversSuite screens:

Container Management

Document Management Viewer

MoversSuite Application

MoversSuite Email

Payment Application

Report Viewer

 

 

SUMMARY (8047, 8128)

Custom Title added to System Wide Options.

MoversSuite updated to display the Custom Title within windows title.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Schema Changes Version 2016R08

System Wide Options

Toolbar

 

 

 

Reports Setup Area

 

We modified MoversSuite Administration by moving all report-related setup areas to list under the new Reports category.

 

Figure 300: MoversSuite Administration

 

 

Prior to this release, the setup areas related to reports listed under Personnel.

 

SUMMARY (8045)

Reports category added to MoversSuite Administration tab.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Report Setup

Report Group Setup

Report Profile Setup

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Revenue Entry Fix

 

Update to third party adjustment/reversals

MoversSuite now allows a partial apply if the Apply To document is not on hold. This affects only third party adjustments and reversals. Specifically, the third party adjustment/reversal posts with associated Apply To documents when the amount of the adjustment/reversal is less than the current amount of the item and the third party item is not on hold. (8098)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R08

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R08)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R08)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R08)

 

 

 

 

Version 2016 R07

 

RELEASE DATE: 3/28/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page to read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

1

New Product Features

2

Release Enhancements

7

Release Fixes

11

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

3

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

NEW PRODUCT FEATURES

 

UniGroup Connection now supports FastTrack driver updates

 

FastTrack CSV Email is now available for our UniGroup customers. This new feature provides a dispatcher a quick way to send FastTrack data to a driver or crew lead via email.

 

Available through a right-click menu within Local Dispatch and Long Distance Dispatch, the new FastTrack CSV Email option opens an email to the driver or crew lead as the recipient.

 

 

Figure 301: Right-click options on the Current Driver Activity tab

 

The email contains some basic order information and provides FastTrack data as an attachment in CSV format. The driver or crew lead can import the information directly into the FastTrack system.

Figure 302: Sample FastTrack CSV email message

 

View the FastTrack CSV Email topic for more information on this new feature.

 

SUMMARY (7259)

FastTrack CSV Email is now available to UniGroup customers.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

FastTrack CSV Email

Right-Click Options (Local Dispatch)

Right-Click Options (Long Distance Dispatch)

 

 

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

 

Subtotal active invoice amount for customers

 

The Invoicing section within the Summary tab in Revenue Entry has been updated to include a sub-total at the bottom of the Amount column. This amount includes the total of all active, open invoices for each customer displaying within the grid.

 

SNAGHTML2527f4ab

Figure 303: Invoicing section within the Summary tab

 

SUMMARY (7997)

Customer sub-total of active invoice amounts added to the Invoice section within the Summary tab.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Summary

 

 

 

Search by National Account within AR Collections Inquiry

 

You now have the ability to search by and filter data by the National Account of an order through the AR Collections Inquiry module.

 

SNAGHTML2518b077

Figure 304: AR Collections Inquiry screen

 

 

 

SUMMARY (7996)

National Account added to the search parameters and to the data grid within AR Collections Inquiry.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

AR Collections Inquiry

 

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administration Changes

 

Compatibility check added

MoversSuite Administration now performs a compatibility check on the database it is attempting to load. If the database is not compatible with the particular version of MoversSuite Administration, then the user receives an error and the application prevents them from accessing the tool.

 

SNAGHTMLa050023

Figure 305: Database Connection Problem dialog

 

As indicated in the image below, the Database Connection error displays the version numbers for database and for the administration tool. (8044)

 

 

SNAGHTML1822e1f

Figure 306: Database Connection dialog

 

SMTP Encryption Support

In response to more users switching to Office 365 for email hosting, MoversSuite now supports TLS encryption for SMTP connections, which is a requirement of Office 365 and several other email-hosting platforms.

 

To enable the TLS encryption support, check the new Enable SSL option is available through SMTP Setup. This option instructs MoversSuite to create and send emails within TLS encryption. (7574)

 

Update Email Options within System Wide Options

We created a new option titled Microsoft Outlook Email Integration within the System Wide Options. When checked, this flag instructs MoversSuite to utilize Outlook fully for its mail management. Turning this flag off, instructs MoversSuite to not recognize Outlook as the primary mail service for sending messages from MoversSuite. (8061)

 

 

Integrations Changes

 

 

UniGroup Message Queue Support

MoversSuite is compatible with UniGroup Message Queue (MQ) 7.0.1 and 7.1.0.3. (8000)

 

 

Local Dispatch Changes

 

Sort Service Branch by ID

The Service Branch selector within Local Dispatch now defaults to a sort by the branch ID. Prior to this version of MoversSuite, an ambiguous sort was in place on this selector. Clicking on the ID or the Name column heading causes the menu to sort by the data within that column. (7952)

 

Figure 307: Service Branch selector within Local Dispatch

 

 

Order Information Changes

 

Full Driver Number displays in Shipment Status History

The Driver Number set within a Personnel Setup record can be up to 15 characters, therefore we updated the Shipment Status History screen display this entire field’s value. Prior to this change, the application only recognized the first six characters of a manually entered driver number. (8011)

 

 

Revenue Entry Changes

 

Third party payables not importing

Reversals associated to third party payables on auto-generated invoices do not show up in Dynamics GP. MoversSuite no longer allows you to select auto-generated invoices for third party items related to adjustments or reversals for any new entry made through the Add Third Party Item (Revenue Entry) screen. (8037)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R07

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R07)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R07)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R07)

 

 

 

 

Version 2016 R06

 

RELEASE DATE: 3/14/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Here is a table containing several commonly requested hyperlinks.

 

Link

Description

Release Overview Video

 

Watch a short video highlighting the changes we have made to MoversSuite at this version.

Printable Release Notes

View current release information through a PDF document.

System Requirements

Read up on the requirements for this version of MoversSuite.

Online Support Page

Check out our Support page and read about the latest MoversSuite release and find links to other useful information.

Product Feedback

See what other MoversSuite customers are requesting for changes to the MoversSuite application and submit your own suggestions.

Past Versions Information

Look through a list of changes made to all other versions of MoversSuite.

Release Overview Videos

Access a list of overview videos for each release.

Schema Changes

Pull up the database changes we made at various releases.

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

1

Release Enhancements

6

Release Fixes

1

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

0

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists the enhancements made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

New Retained Revenue tab in Dynamics GP Order Inquiry

 

Several MoversSuite customers that record third party expenses in Microsoft Dynamics GP (and not in MoversSuite) have no way of knowing the amounts that may affect an order while working in MoversSuite.

MoversSuite now offers a new Retained Revenue tab within the Dynamics GP Order Inquiry to allow a user to view accurate, up-to-date amounts posted in Microsoft Dynamics GP, which may include transactions for customer and vendors not available within MoversSuite.

 

Figure 308: Dynamics GP Order Inquiry

 

This information is summarized into three totals with options to view the details of the amounts in the adjacent data grid. Pressing the Next button () displays the details in the grid for the corresponding total. The customers and vendors listed include those defined in either MoversSuite and/or Microsoft Dynamics GP.

 

Company Revenue

Total original amount of all AR documents that are not payments, excludes Cash Receipts and any transaction coming from Payment Management.

Detail breakdown includes all customers related to the order.

Commissions Paid

Total original amount of all AP documents that are a result of commissions generated through Revenue Entry, excluding any payments/checks.

Detail breakdown includes all vendors related to the order.

Third Party Expenses

Total of the remaining AP expenses associated to the order, excluding payments.

Detail breakdown includes all vendors related to the order.

Retained Revenue

The posted amount of Company Revenue less Commissions Paid less Third Party Expenses.

 

Refer to the Dynamics GP Order Inquiry topic for more information.

 

SUMMARY (7730)

Retained Revenue tab and related data added to the Dynamics GP Order Inquiry.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Dynamics GP Order Inquiry

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Cash Receipts Fixes

 

Invoices for manually added orders not displaying

Prior to this release, if a user manually added an order to a cash receipt, either through the Quick Find or Add Order button, invoices associated to the order failed to show up in the grid. Now, when a user adds an order to the Associated Orders grid manually or through the Customer assignment, all invoices associated to the order display. (7987)

 

No amount included on some invoices

An issue with invoices showing up in the Associated Orders grid without an amount is resolved. (8003)



Claims Fixes

 

Error on Claims invoice

A fix made during release 2016 R05 causes an error in the Claims module when a user attempts to create an invoice. A correction to the previous fix is available in this release: Users no longer receive an “Error encountered building invoice” error in Claims. (8031)

 

 

Integration Fixes

 

Update to allocation percent calculations on Atlas imports

We updated the way allocations compute for Transportation items imported through an Atlas Revenue Import. Since the total allocation typically does not add up to 100%, MoversSuite employs a factor variable to achieve the desired allocation percentage. This only affects revenue items imported from the Atlas Van Line system. (8025)

 

 

Revenue Entry Fixes

 

GoTo Reduction causing error

When editing an item through Add Revenue Item that is a result of an addback reduction and the user presses the GoTo Reduction button, prior to this release MoversSuite produced an error indicating that the “RecordIndex out of range.”  Now MoversSuite opens the correct addback item. (7998)

 

Voiding an invoice reverses sales tax

With a recent change to the MoversSuite invoice number format, a reversal of the sales tax on the invoice was not occurring. With this release, reversing the invoice also reverses the sales tax associated to invoices generated with the old invoice number format. This release of MoversSuite provides a script that identifies any invoice in a partially voided state and creates the necessary sales tax reversal. (8029)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R06

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R06)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R06)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R06)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R05

 

RELEASE DATE: 2/29/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Printable Release Notes

Release Overview Video

System Requirements

Online Support Page

Product Feedback

Past Versions Information

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

3

Release Enhancements

6

Release Fixes

3

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

1

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists the enhancements made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

New Document Management Database

 

Physical memory issues and backup performance issues regarding storage of image files within the MoversSuite database caused us to move document storage to its own database.

 

As of this release, a separate document database is available. The documents database on your system contains the same name as your MoversSuite database along with “Docs” appended to it.

 

New document database name format:

 

[DATABASE ]+Docs

 

Where [DATABASE] is your MoversSuite database. For example, if your database is named MoversSuite2 then your document storage database is named MoversSuite2Docs.

 

Figure 309: Explorer window within Microsoft SQL Server Management

 

This new database must reside on the same server as your MoversSuite database, i.e. there is no support yet for storing documents on a separate server.

 

All new documents added to your system will be stored within the new document database.

 

All exisiting documents will reside in the MSSDocumentImage table within the MoversSuite database. A separate tool has been added to the MoversSuite Deploy Tool that will allow your company to move all exisitng documents to the new database after the upgrade process has completed; the deploy process does not perform this function automatically.

 

The Deploy Tool also generates a new MssDocExec role and grants appropriate priviledges to all current MoversSuite roles.

 

Those customers utilizing Sharepoint document storage are also impacted by this change. All new documents continue to be stored within the Sharepoint document library. Additionally, your company can migrate these document to the new document database using the new option within the Deploy Tool.

 

Meta information on documents will continue to reside within the MSSDocument table in MoversSuite.

 

SUMMARY (5557)

New document database added to store all image files.

Deploy Tool update to create appropriate access controls to the new database and provide a tool that allows a company to migrate existing documents to the new document database.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Document Management

Schema Changes Version 2016R05

 

 

 

Upgrade Tool

 

The Upgrade Tool streamlines all the functions of the deploy process into a simple dialog with a few prompts and performs all necessary tasks including requirements check, database backup, and the installation of the MoversSuite application and related products.

 

Figure 310: MoversSuite Upgrade Tool

 

Read more about this through the Upgrade Tool topic.

 

SUMMARY (7406)

New Upgrade Tool is available for customers wishing to perform a MoversSuite upgrade on their own.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Upgrade Tool

 

 

 

Update Coordinator on Orders from Account Profile Setup

 

MoversSuite now provides your company the ability to update the coordinators on orders associated to a particular Account Profile. Administrators have a new option within the Order Defaults section in Account Profile Setup allowing them to Update Coordinator on Orders.

 

 

Figure 311: Account Profile Setup

 

Pressing this new button opens the Update Coordinator on Orders screen. Orders selected within this screen, by placing a checkmark in the box corresponding to the record, will have the Transportation Coordinator (Name, Address, Phone tab) set to the Coordinator specified as the default within Account Profile Setup.

 

Figure 312: Update Coordinator on Orders screen

 

Order records only appear within this screen for qualified matches on the selected Shipment Status value or values and for the first date in the load date spread (in Range tab on Move Information) specified.

 

SUMMARY (7647)

New Update Coordinator on Orders screen available to set the coordinator for all orders associated to a particular Account Profile Setup record.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Account Profile Setup

Update Coordinator on Orders

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

General Fixes

 

Limit on number of records returned to the Find

Sizeable queries using the Find were causing slowdowns and other performance issues. Therefore, the Find now returns only 1,000 records. A warning displays at the bottom of the dialog when 1,000 records match the search criteria.

 

Figure 313: Find dialog

 

The search results returned are based on the 1,000 newest records existing in the system and the sort is by Last Name/Company Name first and then the First Name/MI column second.

 

All Find dialogs throughout MoversSuite now return no more than 1,000 records. (7864)

 

Update to Create Duplicate Order functionality

MoversSuite now reverses the Consignor and Consignee data from the Move Information tab when the Basic Information (Reverse Addresses) option is on within the Create Duplicate Order dialog. Prior to this release, the Consignor and Consignee did not change though the application reversed the Moving To and Moving From addresses. (7917)

 

 

Integrations Fix

 

SIRVA QLAB no longer updates registered orders

Once a QLAB lead is booked/registered within MoversSuite, i.e. has an Order Number, all subsequent updates through a SIRVA QLAB Lead/Opportunity Download will be ignored. (7981)

 

 

Revenue Entry Fix

 

Set invoice Created Date appropriately

Historically, the Created Date of an invoice was set at the time that a draft of the invoice was created. This can lead to confusion especially if there was considerable time between when the draft was created and when the actual invoice was generated. Now, MoversSuite updates the Created Date at the time the invoice generates. (7958)

 

Duplicate keys in Avalara causing Unique Constraint Error

The new invoice numbering system enacted by MoversSuite caused duplicate key values between drafts that existed prior to the change and new invoice numbers. We updated MoversSuite to ensure that no duplicates invoice keys exist under any circumstance. (8014)

 

Hidden line items no longer sent to Avalara

Line items with no subtotal amount are no longer sent to Avalara as part of the Sales Tax Integration. Group items with no amount or a zero amount are also not sent to the sales tax service. Prior to this fix, revenue items and groups with no amount showed on invoices. (8015)

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R05

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R05)

MoversSuite Document Database Tables (2016R05)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R05)

 

 

 

Version 2016 R04

 

RELEASE DATE: 2/15/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Printable Release Notes

Release Overview Video

System Requirements

Online Support Page

Product Feedback

Past Versions Information

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

4

Release Enhancements

10

Release Fixes

6

Schema Changes (# of database tables affected)

5

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following issue is not resolved for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists the enhancements made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Click to watch MoversSuite Overview Video

Watch this video to see an overview of the changes we made at this release.

 

 

Cancelled Local Services Remain

 

When you cancel a serrvice through Local Services, MoversSuite no longer deletes this record. Instead, the record remains visible within the data grid along with a new status value of “Cancelled.”

 

Figure 314: Local Services tab

 

 

Additionally, the Local Services grid displays the user that cancelled the service along with the date and time of the cancel.

 

NOTE

Services cancelled through Local Dispatch continue to display in the Local Services data grid with a Status of “Not Cleared.”

 

 

SUMMARY (7603)

Services cancelled through Local Services remain visible within the data grid with a Status of “Cancelled.”

Cancelled On and Cancelled By added to the Local Services data grid.

A new Local Services Status of “Cancelled” is available.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Local Services

Local Services Status

 

 

 

Local Service Type Classifiction

 

Your company now has the ability to group or classify local services into logical categories for reporting. The new Classification setting that you can assign to a service type allows your company the ability to report services under a particular category, such as Household Goods or Commercial moves.

 

The Classification field is assigned to a service through Local Service Type Setup.

 

Figure 315: Local Service Type Setup

 

A mass classify feature is also available through the group function in the upper righthand corner of the Local Service Type Setup. This function allows you to set the Classification for all displayed Service Type records at one time.

 

Figure 316: Group functions in Local Service Type Setup

 

Your company can define its own Classification values within the new Local Service Classification Setup. A classification description of up to 64 characters can be defined.

 

Figure 317: Local Service Classification Setup

 

We also include the new Classification setting as a reportable field within the LocalServicesWithinNextWeek data view; this view allows your company the ability to report on Local Services occurring within the next seven days.

 

 

SUMMARY (7900)

New Local Service Classification Setup added.

Classification added to Local Service Type Setup and to the LocalServicesWithinNextWeek data view.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Local Service Classification Setup

Local Service Type Setup

MoversSuite Data Views

Schema Changes Version 2016R04

 

 

 

Branch Location

 

Your company now has the ability to assign a location to a branch for reporting purposes. The new Location field is assignable to a Branch Setup record and provides your company a means of grouping branches by a particular category or geographic area.

 

This categorization is similar to but different than a Dispatching Common View. With the common view, your company can group similar agents together to restrict access to a particular dispatcher. With the branch location, your company can group across a particular area that may include multiple agent and/or branch locations.

 

A new Branch Location Setup is available allowing you to create locations. This setup allows you to assign the location record to branches as well.

 

Figure 318: Branch Location Setup

 

Additionally, your company can assign the Location to a Branch Setup record directly.

 

 

Figure 319: Branch Setup

 

The Group By functions available for multiple Branch Setup records provides a convienent way to set the Location on all displayed branches.

 

Figure 320: Group functions under Branch Setup

 

We also include a new BranchLocation setting as a reportable field within the LocalServicesWithinNextWeek data view; this view allows your company the ability to report on Local Services occurring within the next seven days.

 

SUMMARY (7901)

New Branch Location Setup added.

Location added to Branch Setup.

BranchLocation added to the LocalServicesWithinNextWeek data view.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Branch Setup

Branch Location Setup

MoversSuite Data Views

Schema Changes Version 2016R04

 

 

 

Shipper added to Accept Self Haul email

 

The automated email that generates when a self-haul request is accepted now includes the name of the shipper. The text of this email appears in the following format:

 

 

User [USERNAME] has given self haul authorization for order number [ORDER NUMBER].

 

Shipper: [SHIPPER NAME]

 

 

The subject of the email is labeled, “Self Haul authorization.”

 

Refer to Email Options Templates for details on the email notification.

 

SUMMARY (7908)

Shipper added to the Accept Self Haul email generated through Email Services.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Email Options Templates

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Administrative Fix

 

Label change in Queue Service Server Setup

A confusing label within the edit screen for a Queue Service Server Queue (within Queue Service Server Setup) has been relabeled to “Queue Folder Name.” This option is present only for detail item with a Queue Type of “File System Folder.” (7969)

 

Figure 321: Queue Service Server Queue setup

 

 

 

Cash Receipts Fix

 

Associated Orders grid updates

The data grid for the Associated Order(s) now lists the Order Number and Invoice Number in two separate columns. Prior to this release, the Order Number field displayed a combined order and invoice entry.

 

Additionally, the grid now allows for column sorting, column rearrangement, offers right-click options menu, and separates out master and detail items, if present. Additionally, any changes a user makes to the grid is saved and available the next time they access Cash Receipts. (7670, 8001)

 

 

General Fixes

 

Order History update

The Order History now tracks changes made directly through the SQL database that affect MoversSuite data. Changes made either by a person accessing the database or through any external application are now tracked by the Order History logic and are included in the list of changes under the user the Module/Interface of “Direct SQL.” (7925)

 

Include Revenue Clerk on Duplicate Order

MoversSuite now copies the Revenue Clerk of an order to a new order through the Create Duplicate Order functionality no matter what options are selected. Prior to this release, the new order only included the Revenue Clerk when the Complete Order option was selected. (7854)

 

Credit Warning note created for New Account Order

When a user creates a new MoversSuite order through the New Account Order function (refer to Order-Level Functions) and they receive a credit warning for the customer associated to the Account Profile, MoversSuite now creates a credit warning note attached to the new order. Prior to this fix, a note was not being created when a user received the credit warning. (7887)

 

 

Integrations Fixes

 

SIT Days being cleared on UniGroup download

MoversSuite updates SIT information through a UniGroup SIT Information (Registration) download only if the data does not exist in MoversSuite. Prior to this release, subsequent downloads of SIT Information were overwriting data previously set on an order. For example, if the Days field was set to 7, then an updated Registration send was clearing out this field, i.e. setting Days to 0. (7897)

 

Third Party Application performance issue

The Third Party Application Error Management screen no longer loads all data related to an error. We found that loading the data, which includes the raw XML data associated to the import, was causing performance issues. Now the application loads the data when a user specifically requests it, i.e. selects View Data from the right click menu options. (4304)

 

Trade Show import no longer produces error

An issue where an import of the trade show data produced an error is fixed. Prior to this release, if a UniGroup import of trade show information came in and the import contained a Show Code that matched that of the existing record and the description for the show were different, then MoversSuite produced an error (specifically, the Error Code of 2000 was returned). (7825)

 

 

Recurring Billing Fix

 

Billing Items Total no longer includes Finalized items

The Total for all Billing Items listed for an order within Recurring Billing now only includes the total amount of all active items, i.e. the Total does not include any finalized billing items. In the example below, the $75 Filing amount is not included in the total of $430.95, since it is marked Final (End Billing). (7915)

 

Figure 322: Billing Items tab

 

 

Revenue Entry Fixes

 

Slowness when adding items with auto commissions

MoversSuite encountered slow response times when users added revenue items with auto commissions. This was especially apparent when there were a large number of records within the Transactions grid. The issue of slowness has been addressed. (7562)

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R04

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R04)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R04)

 

 

 

 

Version 2016 R03

 

RELEASE DATE: 2/1/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Printable Release Notes

Release Overview Video

System Requirements

Online Support Page

Product Feedback

Past Versions Information

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

1

Known Issues

2

Release Enhancements

12

Release Fixes

1

Schema Changes (Database Schema Tables Affected)

0

Admin Changes

1

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are known problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following are not fixed for this release.

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists the enhancements made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Click to watch MoversSuite Overview Video

Watch this video to see an overview of the changes we made at this release.

 

 

Service Instructions

 

You can now add service specific notes to each local service. This note follows the service from Local Services to Local Dispatch all the way to the Work Ticket Report.

 

The Add Local Service dialog has been updated to include a new Service Instructions section.

 

Figure 323: Add Local Service dialog

 

Options from a right-click menu allow you to paste text from another location and allow you to copy instructions from the Move Information tab as well. The text of the message is limited 1,024 characters, which is the same number allowed for the Special Instructions and Driving Instructions set for the order.

 

 

Service Instructions are also available to be viewed from the following grids:

Local Services

Dispatch Center

Requested Services

 

Of note, the application displays three lines of text of the message within each of these grids. To view the entire message, you must add or edit the services, i.e. view it from the Add Local Service dialog.

 

We updated the Work Ticket Report as well to include any Service Instructions for all services associated to the ticket. These instructions appear on the report below the Special Instructions and Directions listings.

 

SUMMARY (7355)

Service Instructions added.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Add Local Service

Dispatch Center

Local Services

Requested Services

Schema Changes Version 2016R03

Work Ticket Report

 

 

 

New 1099 Applied by Commission Statement Date Report

 

A new, standard report has been added to this list of available reports. The 1099 Applied by Commission Statement Date Report provides a breakdown of 1099 amounts by statement date for a given driver over a given date range.

 

Refer to 1099 Applied by Commission Statement Date Report for an output listing for this new report.

 

TECHNICAL NOTE

A new category has been added to the Reporting Services listing that includes reporting projects specific to Dynamics GP (i.e. reporting services\gp reports\GP Reports.rptproj). The specifical name of assoicated to the new report is titled 1099 Applied By Comm Stmt Date.rdl and can be added to profiles through Report Profile Setup.

 

(7927)

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Collections Fixes

 

Cleaner note for Customer Credit Verification

The note set for an order when a credit warning is produced has been cleaned up by removing redundant information, such as the Order Number and date (this information is automatically included as part of a note). The credit warning note now contains the following format:

 

“User USERNAME received a warning prompt regarding customer CUSTOMER NAME (CUSTOMER NUMBER). WARNING.”

 

Where:

USERNAME is the MoversSuite user receiving the warning.

CUSTOMER/CUSTOMER NUMBER is the name of the customer prompting the warning along with their customer number.

WARNING is the one of four warning messages:

Customer is on hold

Customer has exceeded their credit limit

Customer is near their credit limit

Customer has no credit

(7889)

 

 

General Fixes

 

Order History updates

The Order History functionality now captures the Estimate Number of a copied order when an order is duplicated. The change that is recorded to the copied order indicates what the Estimate Number was before the copy and that it was “(unset).” Refer to Create Duplicate Order for more information on this functionality. (7827)

 

Additionally, Order History now captures the changes made to the National Account Name. This setting within the Billing Information tab allows a user to modify the Name set for the National Account (not just the default name), so now MoversSuite tracks any changes made to modify the name as well as when the account is changes. (7829)

 

The Bill Date, also known as an order release date, is now included in the list of fields tracked by Order History. Refer to Order History Fields for a complete list of settings tracked by Order History. (7869)

 

 

Required Fields updates

The look of the text within the Field Requirements dialog has been updated. A consistent font style has been employed along with a padding.

 

Figure 324: Updated Field Requirements dialog

 

(7844)

 

 

Integrations Fixes

 

UniGroup SIT Information download agent error

MoversSuite now checks for and validates an agent when inserting SIT Information as a part of a UniGroup download. Prior to this fix, a blank agent included in the SIT portion of the download would be added to MoversSuite along with the SIT data resulting in a third party application error. (7884)

 

 

UniGroup SIT agent update

MoversSuite now references the Origin Agent or Destination Agent (depending on the source) if the agent is not specified on an SIT download (EGI). Prior to this fix, if the agent was not explicitly defined for the SIT, then MoversSuite added a “System Generated Agent” to the database. (7855)

 

 

PSI:Cature Import UTF-8 Formatted Files

The TransDocs Integration now supports importing of documents in the UTF-8 format. Prior to this release, attempts to import UTF-8 format file caused an exception while parsing mssDocs. (7973)

 

 

EasyDPS Queue Service Handler Fix

The MoversSuite Queue Service handler for EasyDPS Integration has been corrected. Prior to this release, the Queue Services threw an error at runtime. (7970)

 

 

QLAB Lead Upload Fix

An error with the SIRVA QLAB Integration that was related to the QuickBooks Integration has been fixed. This was Known Issue for release 5.34 through 2016R02. (7956)

 

 

 

Revenue Entry Fixes

 

Reductions no longer causing Revenue Item error

In cases where there were multiple reductions on an item and a revenue amount was entered manually, users were getting a typical “Existing percentage based reductions will be removed” prompt but which was also followed by an error of “The amount is larger than what the database can store. Please correct the entered value.” The issue causing this error was identified (not all percentage based reductions were removed prior to the manual revenue entry) and corrected. (7918)

 

 

Permissions granted to MSS10500 table

MoversSuite now grants execute permissions on the MSS10500 table allowing revenue transactions to generate without error. Prior to this fix, the application returned the following error to the Error Report Log:

 

A SQL Exception has occurred while generating transactions. Error: The SELECT permission was denied on the object ‘MSS10500’, database… (error code 1042).

 

(7946)

 

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R03

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R03)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R03)

 

Version 2016 R02

 

RELEASE DATE: 1/18/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Printable Release Notes

Release Overview Video

System Requirements

Online Support Page

Product Feedback

Past Versions Information

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

1

Release Requirements

2

Known Issues

3

Release Enhancements

6

Release Fixes

1

Schema Changes (Database Schema Tables Affected)

0

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT DYNAMICS GP REQUIREMENTS

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

 

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

Refer to the System Requirements section for a complete list of hardware and software requirements.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are known problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following are not fixed for this release.

 

SIRVA QLAB Lead Upload Issue

Issues in version 5.34 of MoversSuite and higher are causing an error with SIRVA QLAB Lead Uploads. This issue affects those utilizing the SIRVA QLAB Integration and a workaround is available, if desired. If contacting our Support Team, please reference case 7956 and a fix is to be addressed under case 7811. (7956, 7811)

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists the enhancements made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Click to watch MoversSuite Overview Video

Watch this video to see an overview of the changes we made at this release.

 

Order identifying values now tracked by Order History

 

The following fields have been added to the list of fields tracked by Order History. These are the key values referenced when identifying a MoversSuite such as through the Find or through an integration with an external application.

 

Field

Order Number

Order Segment

Partial Segment

Overflow Segment

Set-Off Segment

Van Line

 

Refer to Order Number and Order Number Setup for more information.

 

SUMMARY (7873)

Fields added to the list of those tracked through the Order History screen.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Order History

Order History Fields

Schema Changes Version 2016R02

 

 

 

Additional check added to UniGroup Rating/Distribution downloads

 

In the case when there is no carton code provided, MoversSuite now checks additional values included in a rating or distribution download from UniGroup to determine the code needed to identify the carton. MoversSuite now interprets the following when attempting to identify a carton code:

 

asrl_carton_code

asrl_code_item

 

 

SUMMARY (7605)

New check added for carton code validation within UniGroup Downloads.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

UniGroup Distribution Download Contents

UniGroup Rating Download Contents

 

 

 

Sort option added to Payment Application Screen

 

A new item has been added to the Options menu within the Payment Application screen. When the Sort Records By Order Number option is checked, the records display sorted by the Order Number in ascending order. When this option is not checked, which is the default, then the records display in the order in which they were added to the payment (newest records listed at the top).

 

Figure 325: Payment Application

 

 

SUMMARY (7835, 7924)

New option of Sort Records By Order Number added to the Option menu within the Payment Application screen.

Sort option settings for the Options menu now saved to a user’s system data (SysUserSettings table) (7924)

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Payment Application

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Claims Fixes

 

Import matching phone types into new claims record

When creating a new claim record, MoversSuite automatically populates the phone numbers within the Claim Detail screen with those defined for the order through Name, Address, Phone. For example, if “Cell Phone” is defined as a phone type within both the Claims module and within the Order Information module and is set for the order, then when a claim is created then the phone number for the Cell Phone is automatically set for the claim.

 

TECHNICAL NOTES

The phone type must match in both the Claim Phone Type Setup and Shipper Phone Type Setup and cannot be either “Home Phone” or “Work Phone,” since the application already pulls in data for the claim for these two types through the Shipper Phone Types of “Moving To Home” and “Moving To Work” already. Refer to Claim Phone Type Setup for more information.

Administrators can update phone types defined within Claim Phone Type Setup to match those set within Shipper Phone Type Setup to streamline data entry.

 

(7803)

 

 

Integrations Fixes

 

SIRVA download now includes remarks

SIRVA notes, such as those for remarks from Allied Van Lines, are now downloaded correctly. Prior to this release, MoversSuite was not translating the note body from SIRVA Download Request and the note text was therefore not set. (7756)

 

UniGroup Registration no driver error

MoversSuite no longer attmept to verify that a driver exists if one is not provided as part of a UniGroup Registraion Download. Prior to this release, MoversSuite would produce an error when no driver is provided; the error was #2092, “The Employee does not exist (or is inactive or does not have the correct labor type) in Personnel Setup. Order: not provided Employee Type: Driver.” (7911)

 

 

Payment Management & Cash Receipts Fixes

 

Update to Cash Receipt Find by Created On date

MoversSuite now ignores the time associated to a date when a search on Created On date is referenced on Find searches through the Cash Receipts module. Prior to this release, the application compared time values when including records in the search, which excluded some records based on the time of day the search was performed. (7765)

 

 

Recurring Billing & Storage Fixes

 

Improved exception handling on storage runs

MoversSuite has improved the way in which it handles errors occurring during a storage billing run. In previous releases, if an exception was encountered during a billing run, MoversSuite continued processing. With this release, MoversSuite halts the storage billing run any time an exception is encountered. These exceptions will be shown to the user and logged. Additionally, anytime a run has been halted and a user attempts to re-start the storage run, the errors from the failed run will appear again and prevent the user from re-starting until the issues have been corrected.

 

Additionally, the timeout for processing a storage billing run has been increased from one hour to 24 hours. There is a lot of processing that occurs during a storage run and an hour may not be enough time, depending on the size of data and amount of records needing to be processed. On prior releases, the application would abort the storage run if the one hour processing time was exceeded. (7856)

 

 

Revenue Entry Fixes

 

Update to hold logic on third party payables

A hold on a third party payable is only removed during the BAT process and if the document is fully applied. Prior to this release, a document remained on hold if a user deleted a reversing entry of payable. (7870)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R02

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R02)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R02)

 

 

Version 2016 R01

 

RELEASE DATE: 1/4/2016

 

QUICK LINKS

Printable Release Notes

Release Overview Video

System Requirements

Schema Changes Version 2016R01

Online Support Page

Product Feedback

Past Versions Information

 

 

RELEASE SUMMARY

 

The following is a table contains counts of the items affecting this release.

 

#

Change Summary

3

Release Requirements

2

Known Issues

4

Release Enhancements

6

Release Fixes

2

Schema Changes (Database Schema Tables Affected)

2

Admin Changes

0

Standard Reports Affected

 

 

RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

Please read the following announcements regarding functionality and hardware/software changes for this release of MoversSuite.

 

IMPORTANT RELEASE REQUIREMENTS

 

MoversSuite is compatible with the following:

 

Microsoft Windows 10

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015 R2 (with ATIP Build 14.0.1)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 14.0.1

 

Refer to the following for information regarding additional requirements you may need to support Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015:

System Requirements for Microsoft Dynamics GP 2015

 

View the MoversSuite Compatibility topic for a list of products compatible with MoversSuite.

 

The following requirements are needed for this release:

 

Microsoft Dynamics GP 2013 R2 (with ATIP Build 12.0.23)

Microsoft Dynamics GP ATIP Build 12.0.23

 

NOTE

Refer to the Hardware Requirements topic in our System Requirements for more information on the requirements for Microsoft Dynamics.

 

 

KNOWN ISSUES

 

The following issues are known problems that may affect your decision to upgrade to this version of MoversSuite. The following are not fixed for this release.

 

SIRVA QLAB Lead Upload Issue

Issues in version 5.34 of MoversSuite and higher are causing an error with SIRVA QLAB Lead Uploads. This issue affects those utilizing the SIRVA QLAB Integration and a workaround is available, if desired. If contacting our Support Team, please reference case 7956 and a fix is to be addressed under case 7811. (7956, 7811)

 

Citrix issue with phone number control

An issue that cannot be replicated is causing the phone numbers within the Shipper Contact Information section (Name, Address, Phone tab) to disappear and then reappear when a user clicks on that section, however, the user cannot edit them until they press Cancel (on the order) and then attempt to Edit again. (6409)

 

 

RELEASE ENHANCEMENTS

 

This section lists the enhancements made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

Click to watch MoversSuite Overview Video

Watch this video to see an overview of the changes we made at this release.

 

New Software Versioning

 

From this release forward, MoversSuite will version using the following format:

 

CCYY R99 (49999)

 

Where CCYY is the four-digit year, R99 is the release number ranging from R01 TO R26, and (49999) is the specific build number for the release.

 

For example, this release of MoversSuite is the first for the year and has a build number for 41015, therefore it displays as “2016 R01 (41015)” within the About MoversSuite option from the Help Menu.

 

Figure 326: About dialog

 

For quicker reference to this number, we’ve also made it available from the Contents Screen.

 

Figure 327: Contents screen

 

 

SUMMARY (7748)

New MoversSuite versioning system employed and visible from the Contents Screen and through the About dialog.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

About

Contents Screen

Help Menu

 

 

 

Updated MoversSuite Desktop Icons

 

The MoversSuite desktop icons that display for quick access to launch MoversSuite and related products have been updated. Smaller versions of these icons also display in the title bar of the application window. The following table displays the new MoversSuite desktop icons.

 

Desktop Icon

References

MoversSuite Administration

MoversSuite Application

Container Management

 

 

SUMMARY (7712)

New desktop icons to represent the three launchable MoversSuite applications.

 

 

 

Field Requirement Updates

 

More reactive user interface

 

MoversSuite now provides a more reactive flow to the behavior of the Required Fields. Users working in MoversSuite will instantly see required fields highlighted in the application when setting a field that affects field requirements. For example, if Required Fields has been setup to require that the Authority be set when the Actual Load Date, then the application automatically highlights the Authority when the load date is set.

 

Figure 328: Move Information tab

 

Of note, MoversSuite still produces a warning dialog in the event that Save is pressed and required field are not set. (7839)

 

 

Check required fields when booking the order

 

Required Fields now verifies field requirements upon booking an order. MoversSuite now prevents a user from booking an order when field requirements based on the On Book trigger (Field Requirements Setup) are not set on the order. (7848)

 

Figure 329: Field Requirements dialog

 

                                                                                                                                                                                     

Check required fields when adding first service

 

When a user attempts to add the first local service to an order with Required Fields, MoversSuite produces a warning dialog that prevents the user from accessing the Add Local Service dialog when field requirements based on the On First Service trigger (Field Requirements Setup) are not set. (7840)

 

Figure 330: Field Requirements dialog

 

 

SUMMARY (7839, 7840, 7848)

Added logic to enforce field requirements for the On Book and On First Service triggers (Field Requirements Setup)

Real-time field highlighting of required fields when a trigger field is set.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

Required Fields

 

 

 

New MoversSuite Data View

 

A new, standard MoversSuite Data Views titled “LocalServicesWithinNextWeek” is available that can provide raw data listing all Local Services for the current system date up to seven days into the future.

 

See the details of the entire view through the following link:

 

LocalServicesWithinNextWeek Data View

 

See all views for this release:

 

Standard MoversSuite Data Views

 

 

SUMMARY (7880)

New LocalServicesWithinNextWeek added to MoversSuite Data Views.

The following areas have been affected by this enhancement:

MoversSuite Data Views

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R01)

 

 

 

 

RELEASE FIXES

 

This section lists any fixes made to MoversSuite for this release.

 

General Fixes

 

MoversSuite is compatible with Windows 10

With this release, MoversSuite announces its compatibility with the Windows 10 operating system. Refer to System Requirements for more information. (7792)

 

Field Requirements Label Update

The title labels for several of the setup events under the Field Requirements Setup have been updated to clarify their meaning. The following label changes have been made to this setup:

 

Label Changed From

Label Changed To

On Actual Load Set

On Actual Load Date Set

On Actual Delivery Set

On Actual Delivery Date Set

On Order Status Changed

On Order Status Change

On Shipment Status Changed

On Shipment Status Change

(7849)

 

 

Order History now capture order address removal

The Order History now captures a when an order address (Name, Address, Phone) is completely blanked-out by a user. (7800)

 

Added ability to enter manual email addresses for credit warning

 

The Credit Warning Lockdown Setup has been updated to allow your company to send an email notification to one or more manually entered recipients. Prior to this correction, users entered the email through a dialog within the MoversSuite application. Now, administrators have control over this list. (7876)

 

 

Local Services & Dispatching Fixes

 

Default service start time corrected

A potential issue related to a bad start time being associated to a service start time has been corrected. The service start time is now set accordingly. (7907)

 

 

Payment Management & Cash Receipts Fixes

 

CSV Import no longer applies twice

Payment Application issues involving a CSV import auto applying a statement twice have been fixed. Additionally, the record listing of the grid after the apply displays in the same order as the import file. (7866)

 

 

 

SCHEMA CHANGES

 

Schema Changes Version 2016R01

 

The following links allows you to navigate through all MoversSuite tables and data views and allows you to view field properties, such as type and maximum value size, etc.

 

MoversSuite Database Tables (2016R01)

MoversSuite Data Views (2016R01)